1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Note Note
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
497 Code box prevent that the term
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
507 More about \SpecialChar TeX
508 Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 is explained in section
525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
527 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
547 See section 5.1 of the
551 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 \begin_layout Chapter
556 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
560 \begin_layout Section
561 Basic File Operations
562 \begin_inset Index idx
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
574 \begin_layout Standard
579 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
580 in addition to some more advanced operations:
583 \begin_layout Itemize
605 \begin_layout Itemize
621 arg "buffer-new-template"
627 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
743 a few minor differences.
746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
757 command lists the available templates.
758 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
759 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
760 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
768 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
809 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
810 is just that — a big, blank space.
818 \begin_layout Standard
839 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
847 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
865 will reload the document from disk.
866 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
867 and want to restore it to the last save.
876 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
877 them as your changes.
880 \begin_layout Section
881 Basic Editing Features
882 \begin_inset Index idx
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
894 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
903 can perform cut and paste operations
904 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
905 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
906 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
907 editing features and how to access
909 We will start with cut and paste.
912 \begin_layout Standard
913 As you might expect, the
917 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
918 various other editing features.
919 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1033 \begin_layout Itemize
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1043 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset Index idx
1070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_inset Index idx
1082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1113 \begin_layout Standard
1114 The first three are self-explanatory.
1115 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1116 and other programs by
1137 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1138 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1143 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1144 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1145 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1146 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1147 into individual cells.
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1157 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1161 \begin_layout Standard
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1172 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1188 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1189 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1195 \begin_inset space \space{}
1198 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1199 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1205 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1224 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1225 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1227 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1236 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1237 start a new paragraph.
1238 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1239 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 paste from the primary selection.
1268 This is normally the currently selected text.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1304 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 button to skip the current word.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1341 If the toggle is set, searching for
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 will not match the word
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 Match whole words only
1370 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1371 to only find complete words, e.
1372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 offers also an advanced
1404 \begin_inset space ~
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 feature that is described in sec.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1420 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1428 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1429 \begin_inset space \space{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1441 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1443 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1448 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "inset-select-all"
1462 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1463 When the cursor is inside an inset
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 selects the content of the inset.
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1481 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1484 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1488 \begin_layout Section
1490 \begin_inset Index idx
1493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1512 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1519 \begin_layout Standard
1520 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1522 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1534 to undo some mistake.
1535 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1540 or the toolbar button
1547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1554 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1558 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1572 This is a consequence of the 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 step undo limit mentioned above.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1588 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1590 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset Index idx
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 \begin_layout Standard
1609 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1612 \begin_layout Enumerate
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 once anywhere in the edit window.
1623 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1645 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 \begin_layout Enumerate
1661 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1667 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1671 \begin_layout Section
1673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1675 name "sec:Navigating"
1680 \begin_inset Index idx
1683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1694 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1697 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1703 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1709 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 or by the toolbar button
1719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1731 and use the same menu to return to them.
1732 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1744 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1752 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1753 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1754 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1755 your last editing position.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1763 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1767 \begin_layout Subsection
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1771 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1778 \begin_layout Standard
1779 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1780 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1781 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1793 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1805 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1810 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1811 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1812 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1813 dialog and to modify the citation.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1819 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1820 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1833 you further to control the display.
1838 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1839 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1845 option keeps it in the current view state.
1846 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 3, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1863 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1878 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1888 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1889 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1903 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1904 So, for example, you can move section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2.4 or after section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1918 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1931 (or the corresponding key bindings
1939 ) you can change the level of sections.
1940 So you can for example make section
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_layout Section
1956 Input/Word Completion
1957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1959 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2010 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2012 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2013 is used to propose completions.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2017 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2025 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2041 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2051 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2061 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2062 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2063 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2064 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2069 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2070 completions available.
2075 key to accept a proposed completion.
2076 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2077 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2078 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2086 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2087 ing options for text.
2088 The special math option
2092 enables characters to be composed.
2093 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2094 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2097 , you can then input the characters
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2109 to a formula to get it.
2110 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2111 of the math toolbar.
2112 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2116 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2117 's installation folder.
2118 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2220 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2223 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2227 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2234 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2274 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2278 \begin_layout Labeling
2279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2283 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2284 LatexCommand nomenclature
2286 description "Tabulator key"
2292 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2294 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2301 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2312 , especially section
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "subsec:Lists"
2325 If you are still confused, look in the
2330 \begin_inset Newline newline
2338 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2339 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2343 \begin_layout Labeling
2344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2349 LatexCommand nomenclature
2351 description "Escape key"
2358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2366 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset space ~
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2387 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2388 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2393 There are three modifier keys:
2396 \begin_layout Labeling
2397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2416 LatexCommand nomenclature
2418 description "Control key"
2422 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2423 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2427 \begin_layout Itemize
2436 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2439 \begin_layout Itemize
2448 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2451 \begin_layout Itemize
2460 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2464 \begin_layout Labeling
2465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2484 LatexCommand nomenclature
2486 description "Shift key"
2490 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2491 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2494 \begin_layout Labeling
2495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2514 LatexCommand nomenclature
2516 description "Alt or Meta key"
2520 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2521 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2522 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2528 \begin_inset Newline newline
2531 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2533 menu accelerator keys
2536 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2537 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For example, the sequence
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset space ~
2592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2607 manual lists all other things bound to the
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2618 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2619 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2620 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2621 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2622 The \SpecialChar LyX
2623 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2624 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2625 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2627 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 followed by a capital
2650 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Section
2668 \begin_inset Index idx
2671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2684 \begin_layout Standard
2685 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2686 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2687 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2688 numbering schemes, and so on.
2689 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2690 and format the title of your document differently.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2698 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2699 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2700 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2701 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2702 picks one for you by default.
2703 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2706 \begin_layout Subsection
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2720 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 You can select a class using the
2730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2735 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2759 \begin_layout Description
2760 Article for basic articles
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Report for basic reports
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Book for writing a book
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Letter for US-style letters
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2777 only uses if you have installed
2778 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2780 distributions will include
2782 Here are some of the classes.
2783 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2785 Special Document Classes
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2810 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2811 There are three article layouts available.
2812 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2813 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2814 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2815 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2820 sequential numbering
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2824 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2825 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2826 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2827 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Beamer Layout for presentations
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2836 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2837 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2838 with \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2858 \begin_layout Description
2859 Foils Used to make transparencies
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2864 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2865 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2866 with \SpecialChar LyX
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2872 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2885 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2886 (Is used by this document.)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2897 \begin_layout Description
2902 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2903 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2905 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2909 \begin_layout Description
2910 Slides Used to make transparencies
2913 \begin_layout Description
2915 \begin_inset space ~
2918 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2919 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2929 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2935 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2936 of the document classes.
2939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2969 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2970 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2972 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2975 \begin_layout Standard
2978 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2983 , are highly specialized.
2985 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2986 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2987 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2988 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2989 by some document class.
2990 There are just too many of them.
2991 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2995 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3004 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3005 document class for a new file.
3007 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3021 manual for information on how to install them.
3022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3029 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3030 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3031 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3032 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 class files to be used for dissertation
3034 s submitted to those universities.
3035 The \SpecialChar LyX
3036 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3038 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3042 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3048 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3055 name "subsec:Modules"
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3074 chosen document class.
3075 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3076 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3087 \begin_inset Index idx
3090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3103 packages or file format converters that are not always
3104 installed by default.
3106 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3107 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3108 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3109 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3111 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 file without the missing prerequisites.
3113 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3114 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3121 \begin_inset Index idx
3124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3158 will advise you about these things.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3170 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3175 \begin_inset Index idx
3178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3179 Document ! Local Layout
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3189 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 : They are intended to be used in
3191 a variety of different documents.
3192 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3193 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3194 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3195 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3196 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 manual for information on how to use it.
3219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Each class has a default set of options.
3225 Here's a quick table describing them:
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset Tabular
3238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 You're probably also wondering what
3707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3719 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3720 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3725 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3730 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3740 headings, there are also
3748 headings, and so on.
3749 We will describe these headings fully in section
3750 \begin_inset space ~
3754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3756 reference "subsec:Headings"
3763 \begin_layout Subsection
3765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3767 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3772 \begin_inset Index idx
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3817 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3819 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3820 doesn't support special options you want to
3821 use for your document.
3822 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3823 -class and its options, you have to read
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3844 \begin_inset space ~
3849 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3850 You can choose between the following five options:
3853 \begin_layout Labeling
3854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3859 Use default page style of current class.
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 No page numbers or headings.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3886 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3887 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3888 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3889 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3892 \begin_layout Labeling
3893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3898 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3899 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 \begin_inset Index idx
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 -packages ! fancyhdr
3916 How they are defined is explained in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3938 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3945 \begin_layout Subsection
3946 Paper Size and Orientation
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 Document ! Paper size
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3966 \begin_layout Standard
3967 You can find the following options in the menu
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4003 What size paper to print on.
4008 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 \begin_layout Itemize
4020 \begin_layout Itemize
4026 \begin_layout Itemize
4032 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 US letter, US legal, US executive
4038 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Labeling
4052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4057 To choose whether to output as
4068 \begin_layout Labeling
4069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 \begin_inset space ~
4078 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4079 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Margins"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 Paper margins are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4134 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4135 the paper format and the font size into account.
4138 \begin_layout Subsection
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4143 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4149 That includes the paragraph environments.
4150 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4151 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4152 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4154 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4163 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4165 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4166 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4167 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4170 \begin_layout Section
4171 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 Paragraph ! Indentation
4184 \begin_layout Subsection
4186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4188 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4197 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4200 \begin_layout Standard
4201 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4202 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4203 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4204 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4208 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4214 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4215 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4216 language than English.
4218 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4221 \begin_layout Standard
4222 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4223 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4224 into \SpecialChar LyX
4226 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4229 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4231 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4232 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4233 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4241 goes to produce a printable file.
4246 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4248 gives you the ability globally to change
4252 these pre-coded spacings.
4253 We will explain more later.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 Paragraph Separation
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Paragraph ! Separation
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4316 \begin_layout Subsection
4320 \begin_layout Standard
4321 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 dialog and toggle the
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4342 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4346 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4347 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4353 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4389 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 -packages ! setspace
4419 installed to use this feature.
4424 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4433 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4434 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4437 \begin_layout Section
4438 Paragraph Environments
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4446 \begin_inset Index idx
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 Paragraph ! Environments
4456 \begin_inset Index idx
4459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 Paragraph environments|(
4468 \begin_layout Subsection
4472 \begin_layout Standard
4473 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset Newline newline
4498 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4501 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4502 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4511 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 A paragraph environment is simply a
4516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4523 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4524 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4525 scheme, labels, and so on.
4526 Additionally, you can
4527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4534 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4535 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4536 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4537 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4539 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4541 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4546 \begin_inset Graphics
4547 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4553 at the left end of the toolbar.
4555 will change the environment of the
4559 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4560 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4561 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4574 create a new paragraph using the
4578 paragraph environment.
4580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4587 because if you are in one of these environments:
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4638 , rather than resetting it to
4643 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4650 reference "sec:Nesting"
4657 \begin_layout Subsection
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 The default paragraph environment is
4667 It creates a plain paragraph.
4669 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4670 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4671 this manual) are in the
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 You can nest a paragraph using the
4683 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4691 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4716 for thanks or contact information.
4717 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4718 places all of this on a separate page
4719 along with today's date.
4720 For other types of documents, the title
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4734 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4748 Here's how you use them:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 Put the title of your document in the
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the author name in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4769 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4775 Note that using this environment is optional.
4776 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4777 will automatically insert today's date.
4778 If you don't want a date, use the option
4780 Suppress default date on front page
4784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_layout Standard
4796 You can use footnotes to insert
4797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4804 or contact information.
4807 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_inset Index idx
4812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4821 name "subsec:Headings"
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4831 takes care of the numbering for you.
4834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Section headings ! Numbered
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Enumerate
4889 \begin_layout Enumerate
4895 \begin_layout Standard
4897 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4898 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4899 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4903 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4904 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4905 You group the book into chapters.
4907 does a similar grouping:
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 is divided into either
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Not all document types use the
4999 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5004 is the top-level heading.
5012 \begin_layout Standard
5017 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5018 labels it with its number,
5019 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5021 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 The unnumbered section headings have a
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 at the end of their name.
5057 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5058 the table of contents, see section
5059 \begin_inset space ~
5063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5073 Changing the Numbering
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5085 in the Table of Contents.
5086 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5088 Just as certain classes start with
5102 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5112 This is something you can change.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5138 \begin_inset space ~
5143 you will see two counters.
5148 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5149 numbers a section heading.
5150 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 Short Titles of Headings
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Section headings ! Short titles
5166 \begin_inset Argument 1
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5178 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5185 \begin_layout Standard
5186 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5187 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5188 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5189 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5194 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5195 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5196 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5197 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5208 This will insert a box labeled
5209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5213 \begin_inset space ~
5217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5220 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5221 This also works for captions inside floats.
5222 There can only be one short title per title.
5225 \begin_layout Standard
5226 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The following information applies to all section headings:
5237 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5253 \begin_layout Subsection
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5259 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5273 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5274 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5275 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5276 the text they contain.
5277 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5285 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5298 when you start a new paragraph.
5299 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5303 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5304 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5305 have to change back to the
5309 environment yourself.
5312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5335 time for the differences.
5344 are identical except for one difference:
5348 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5357 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Here's an example of the
5374 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5376 See – no indentation!
5380 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5381 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5382 the other paragraph.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's another example, this time in the
5393 \begin_layout Quotation
5399 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5400 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5401 the first line, then
5405 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5409 you were quoting other text.
5412 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 Here's a new paragraph.
5414 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5415 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5419 As the examples show,
5423 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5424 They should put quotes in the
5429 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5433 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5472 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5478 \begin_inset Newline newline
5481 Which I did not rehearse!
5485 It could be much worse.
5486 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5488 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5489 indented a bit more than the first.
5490 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5499 And make things look fine
5500 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 arg "newline-insert newline"
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5517 does not indent both margins.
5518 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5519 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5574 describing some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5608 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5616 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5617 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5618 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5620 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5621 you read all of section
5622 \begin_inset space ~
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5628 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The items can have any length.
5683 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5684 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 environment inside another
5700 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5721 reference "sec:Nesting"
5725 for a full explanation of nesting.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5739 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5744 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 The label for the first level
5752 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the second level is a dash.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5771 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 Back out to the third level.
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 Back to the second level.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 Back to the outermost level.
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 These are the default labels for an
5791 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5796 dialog in the submenu
5801 \begin_inset Index idx
5804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5810 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5814 \begin_layout Standard
5815 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5816 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5818 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5824 reference "sec:Nesting"
5831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5845 name "sec:Enumerate"
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5857 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5858 It has these properties:
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 environment resets the counter to one.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5899 Items can have any length.
5902 \begin_layout Enumerate
5903 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5924 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5926 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5927 labels the four different levels in an
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 The first level of an
5939 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5953 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 Back to the third level
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 Back to the second level.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 Back to the outermost level.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5982 environment, see section
5983 \begin_inset space ~
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5989 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5994 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5998 \begin_layout Standard
5999 There is more to nesting
6003 environments than we've stated here.
6004 You should read section
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sec:Nesting"
6015 to learn more about nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6020 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6037 list has no fixed label.
6038 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6047 of the first line as the label.
6051 \begin_layout Description
6052 Example: This is an example of the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6061 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6074 it is meant that the first usage of the
6078 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6080 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6102 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6108 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6112 for more information.) Here is an example:
6115 \begin_layout Description
6117 \begin_inset space ~
6120 Example: This one shows how to use a
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_layout Description
6136 Usage: You should use the
6140 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6141 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6143 It's not a good idea to use a
6147 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6148 You're better off using
6160 paragraphs into them.
6163 \begin_layout Description
6164 Nesting: You can nest
6168 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6174 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6175 them from the first line.
6178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6197 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6198 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6211 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6213 Here are its properties:
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6231 of each line as the item label.
6236 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6237 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6238 space as described above.
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6243 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6244 uses different margins for the item label and the
6245 body of the item text.
6246 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6247 label width plus a little extra space.
6251 \begin_layout Labeling
6252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6257 width \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6259 If the label width is larger, the label
6260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 into the first line.
6268 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6269 margin of the rest of the item text.
6272 \begin_layout Labeling
6273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6278 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6283 environment has the same left margin.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 dialog (toolbar button
6300 arg "layout-paragraph"
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 determines the default label width.
6313 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 multiple times instead.
6323 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6341 every time you alter a label in a
6346 \begin_inset Newline newline
6349 The predefined default width is the length of
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_layout Standard
6369 list the same way as the
6373 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6379 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6388 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6389 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6397 reference "sec:Nesting"
6401 to learn about nesting.
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 There is yet another feature of the
6409 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 left-justifies the item labels by
6412 You can use additional
6416 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6417 justifies the item label.
6422 are documented in section
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6429 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6434 Here are some examples:
6437 \begin_layout Labeling
6438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6439 Left The default for
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6455 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6458 \begin_layout Labeling
6459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6474 \begin_layout Subsection
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6478 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6483 \begin_inset Index idx
6486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 The features described in this section require that the module
6498 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6500 is loaded in the document settings.
6501 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6512 -packages ! enumitem
6520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6521 Custom Enumerate Lists
6522 \begin_inset Index idx
6525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6543 There you add the command
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6568 Code, look at section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6588 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6595 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6596 For capital Roman numerals replace
6608 in the command above.
6609 For Arabic numerals use
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 You can only number 26
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6653 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6663 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6667 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 \begin_inset Argument 1
6674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_inset Argument 1
6704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 \begin_inset Argument 1
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_inset Argument 1
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 For this list these commands were used:
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6805 \begin_inset Newline newline
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6838 makes the label emphasized and
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6857 lists until you change the definition.
6865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6867 \begin_inset Index idx
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_inset Note Note
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 goes back to default numbering
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6931 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6936 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6937 to indicate that it is a resumed
6938 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6939 , but in the output.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6963 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6964 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6965 of a normal enumeration.
6966 There, insert the command
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6980 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_inset Argument 1
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 This enumeration starts at 4
7019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7021 \begin_inset Index idx
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7036 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 with standard spacing
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7050 Add there the command
7054 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Itemize
7084 \begin_layout Itemize
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7096 \begin_inset Index idx
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 -packages ! enumitem
7107 For more information see its documentation,
7108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7120 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7121 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7125 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7129 \begin_inset Argument 1
7132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7140 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 with negative indentation
7157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7158 Further Customization
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 Lists ! Customization
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 You can also change the style of description lists.
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 changes the description label font, the command
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 sets the list style.
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 An example where the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7205 itshape, style=nextline
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7212 \begin_layout Description
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7218 \begin_inset Argument 1
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7229 itshape, style=nextline
7239 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7240 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7244 \begin_layout Description
7246 \begin_inset space ~
7249 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7250 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7251 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 -packages ! enumitem
7272 For more information see its documentation
7273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7282 \begin_layout Subsection
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7298 \begin_inset space ~
7301 Address: An Overview
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7306 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7321 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7322 gags on the document.
7323 In contrast, you can use the
7330 \begin_inset space ~
7335 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7336 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 Of course, you're not limited to using
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7362 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7363 some European academic papers.
7366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7370 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7382 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7383 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7392 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7393 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7394 Here's an example of each:
7397 \begin_layout Right Address
7399 \begin_inset Newline newline
7403 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 When is it? What is today?
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7425 the largest block of text on a single line.
7426 Here's an example of the
7433 \begin_layout Address
7435 \begin_inset Newline newline
7438 Where do I send this
7439 \begin_inset Newline newline
7442 Your post office and country
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 As you can see, both
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7463 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7464 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7470 This makes sense, since
7478 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7479 Thus, you have to use
7486 arg "newline-insert newline"
7491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 ) to start a new line in an
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7518 \begin_layout Subsection
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7524 or list of references.
7526 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset Index idx
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Standard
7548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7549 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7550 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7551 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7566 The book document classes ignores the
7570 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7574 in a letter document class.
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7582 environment does several things for you.
7583 First, it puts the centered label
7584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7592 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7594 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7595 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7596 the subsequent text.
7597 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7599 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7603 \begin_layout Standard
7604 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7608 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7609 The new paragraph will still be in the
7614 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7615 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 \begin_inset Float figure
7624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7626 \begin_inset Graphics
7627 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7640 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7661 \begin_layout Standard
7662 We would love to demonstrate the
7666 environment, but since this document is in the
7667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7674 class, we can't do this.
7675 We inserted it therefore as figure
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7687 If you have never heard of an
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7712 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used to list references.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the end of the document.
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7739 When you first open a
7743 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7744 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 depending on the document class.
7761 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7762 Each paragraph of the
7766 environment is a bibliography entry.
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 Each new paragraph is still in the
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7781 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7783 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7785 handling, have a look at section
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7799 \begin_layout Subsection
7800 Special Environments
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7805 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7806 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7842 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7847 key as a fixed whitespace.
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7864 \begin_inset space ~
7869 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7887 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7890 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7893 arg "newline-insert newline"
7910 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7911 So, when you finish using the
7916 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7917 Also, you can nest the
7922 environment inside of others.
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7933 arg "newline-insert newline"
7936 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7941 \begin_inset space \space{}
7951 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7971 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7979 You must put at least one
7983 in any line you want blank.
7984 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7988 \begin_layout Itemize
7989 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7993 since that will insert
7998 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8001 arg "self-insert \""
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8011 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 printf("Hello World!
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 This is just the standard
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8060 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8062 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8063 as if you used a typewriter.
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8068 Paragraph environments|)
8073 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8076 Program Code Listings
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8110 environment is similar to the
8115 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8116 computer console text.
8121 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8135 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8136 you can have empty lines.
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 have a certain language and a text style
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8155 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8156 and \SpecialChar TeX
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Because of these properties
8165 works like a typewriter.
8169 \begin_layout Verbatim
8174 \begin_layout Verbatim
8178 The following 2 lines are empty:
8181 \begin_layout Verbatim
8185 \begin_layout Verbatim
8189 \begin_layout Verbatim
8191 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8201 environment is identical to
8205 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8206 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8213 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8218 \begin_layout Section
8219 Nesting Environments
8220 \begin_inset Index idx
8223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 Nesting ! Environments
8230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8239 \begin_layout Subsection
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8245 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8247 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8249 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8251 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 \begin_layout Standard
8286 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8287 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8295 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8307 \begin_inset space ~
8312 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8314 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8317 arg "depth-increment"
8323 arg "depth-decrement"
8337 arg "depth-increment"
8343 arg "depth-decrement"
8347 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8348 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8353 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8354 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8355 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8356 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8357 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8363 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8365 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8368 \begin_layout Subsection
8369 What You Can and Can't Nest
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8373 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8374 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8377 \begin_layout Standard
8378 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8379 than a simple yes or no.
8380 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Completely unnestable
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8392 \begin_layout Itemize
8393 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8397 \begin_layout Standard
8398 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8399 environments have them:
8402 \begin_layout Description
8403 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8404 Can't nest into them.
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 \begin_layout Itemize
8432 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Description
8441 \begin_inset space ~
8444 Nestable You can nest them.
8445 You can nest other things into them.
8449 \begin_layout Itemize
8455 \begin_layout Itemize
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 \begin_layout Itemize
8479 \begin_layout Itemize
8485 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Description
8512 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8513 You can't nest anything into them.
8517 \begin_layout Itemize
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8529 \begin_layout Itemize
8535 \begin_layout Itemize
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8565 \begin_layout Itemize
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_inset space ~
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8612 \begin_layout Standard
8613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8621 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8631 \begin_inset space ~
8634 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8635 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8636 nested section headings violate this.
8644 \begin_layout Subsection
8645 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8646 \begin_inset Index idx
8649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8658 \begin_layout Standard
8659 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8660 affected by nesting anyhow.
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Standard
8678 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8686 Figures and tables in
8690 are not affected by this.
8695 Have a look at section
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8702 reference "sec:Floats"
8706 for more information about
8713 \begin_layout Standard
8715 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8716 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8729 of its own, it behaves just like a
8730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8737 paragraph environment.
8738 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8742 \begin_layout Standard
8743 Here's an example with a table:
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8751 \begin_layout Enumerate
8752 This is (a) and it's nested.
8756 \begin_layout Standard
8757 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8765 \begin_inset Tabular
8766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8767 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8769 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8861 \begin_layout Enumerate
8863 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8867 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8875 \begin_layout Enumerate
8880 \begin_layout Enumerate
8881 This is (a) and it's nested.
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8894 \begin_inset Tabular
8895 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8896 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8897 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8989 \begin_layout Enumerate
8996 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8999 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9008 \begin_layout Standard
9009 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9012 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 This is (a) and it's nested.
9024 \begin_layout Standard
9025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9033 \begin_inset Tabular
9034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_layout Standard
9123 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9129 \begin_layout Enumerate
9131 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9142 \begin_layout Standard
9143 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9149 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9150 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9154 \begin_layout Subsection
9155 Usage and General Features
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9160 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9169 is the innermost possible depth.
9170 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9174 level #1 – outermost
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9208 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9209 both of them in the example.
9210 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9220 For example, if we tried to nest another
9225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9232 , we would get errors.
9235 \begin_layout Subsection
9237 \begin_inset Index idx
9240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9249 \begin_layout Standard
9250 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9251 We have several examples of nested environments.
9252 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9257 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9260 \begin_layout Labeling
9261 \labelwidthstring MMM
9262 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #2-a This is level #2.
9274 We created it by using
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-increment"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9292 #3-a This is level #3.
9293 This time, we just enter
9300 arg "depth-increment"
9304 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9314 arg "depth-increment"
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9326 environment, nested inside of
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 So, it's at level #4.
9336 We did this by entering
9339 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9345 arg "depth-increment"
9348 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9353 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9369 \begin_layout Standard
9374 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9377 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9383 \begin_layout Labeling
9384 \labelwidthstring MMM
9385 #4-a This is level #4.
9389 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9392 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9397 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9401 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9406 keep nesting things inside
9407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9418 \begin_layout Labeling
9419 \labelwidthstring MMM
9420 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9428 and this is level #6.
9429 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9433 \begin_layout Labeling
9434 \labelwidthstring MMM
9435 #5-b Back to level #5.
9439 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9445 arg "depth-decrement"
9452 \begin_layout Labeling
9453 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9463 arg "depth-decrement"
9466 , we're back at level #4.
9470 \begin_layout Labeling
9471 \labelwidthstring MMM
9472 #3-b Back to level #3.
9473 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9477 \begin_layout Labeling
9478 \labelwidthstring MMM
9479 #2-b Back to level #2.
9484 \begin_layout Labeling
9485 \labelwidthstring MMM
9486 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9487 After this sentence, we will enter
9491 and change the paragraph environment back to
9498 \begin_layout Standard
9499 We could have also used the
9515 environment in place of the
9520 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9524 Example 2: Inheritance
9527 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9528 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9531 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9540 arg "depth-increment"
9544 \begin_inset Newline newline
9547 which, we will change to the
9555 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 environment, at level #2.
9563 \begin_layout Enumerate
9564 Notice how the nested
9568 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9572 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9576 \begin_layout Standard
9577 We ended this example by entering
9582 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9586 and reset the nesting depth by using
9589 arg "depth-decrement"
9595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9596 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9605 \begin_inset Argument 1
9608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9609 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9618 This is level #1, in an
9622 paragraph environment.
9623 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9627 \begin_layout Enumerate
9632 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9638 arg "depth-increment"
9642 Now, what happens if we nest an
9646 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9647 label be? An asterisk?
9651 \begin_layout Itemize
9661 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9662 So, its label is a bullet.
9663 (We got here by using
9666 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9672 arg "depth-increment"
9675 , then changing the environment to
9683 \begin_layout Itemize
9684 Here's level #4, produced using
9687 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9693 arg "depth-increment"
9697 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9702 \begin_layout Enumerate
9705 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9710 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9714 , because we are in the
9722 environment (that is, it is an
9737 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9743 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9748 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9751 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9754 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 to decrease the depth after the next
9767 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9774 \begin_layout Enumerate
9776 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9784 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9789 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9798 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9803 reset the counter for the label.
9807 \begin_layout Enumerate
9811 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9817 arg "depth-decrement"
9820 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9821 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9822 into the twofold-nested
9830 \begin_layout Enumerate
9831 The same thing happens if we do another
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-decrement"
9843 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9846 \begin_layout Standard
9847 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9852 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9867 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9874 The same rule applies for the
9878 environment, as well.
9881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9882 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9885 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9887 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9888 the same detail with how we did it.
9897 \begin_layout Standard
9905 arg "depth-increment"
9912 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9913 the example in parentheses someplace.
9914 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9915 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9916 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9930 Now we will add verse.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9934 It will get much worse.
9935 \begin_inset Newline newline
9945 arg "depth-increment"
9956 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9957 \begin_inset Newline newline
9960 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9961 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 \begin_layout Standard
9981 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9989 \begin_inset Tabular
9990 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9991 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9992 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9993 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10078 \begin_layout Verse
10082 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10092 arg "depth-increment"
10098 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10112 arg "depth-decrement"
10119 \begin_layout Enumerate
10124 : level #1) This is another item.
10125 Note that selecting a
10129 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10130 3 times to put the table inside the
10138 \begin_layout Quotation
10139 We're now ending the
10143 list and changing to
10148 We're still at level #1.
10149 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10150 The next set of paragraphs is a
10151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10158 We will nest both the
10165 \begin_inset space ~
10170 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10174 for the letter body.
10178 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10181 to preserve the depth.
10182 Remember that you need to use
10185 arg "newline-insert newline"
10188 to create multiple lines inside the
10195 \begin_inset space ~
10205 \begin_layout Right Address
10207 \begin_inset Newline newline
10210 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10211 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 \begin_layout Address
10219 \begin_inset space ~
10225 \begin_layout Quotation
10226 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10230 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10231 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10232 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10233 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10234 as soon as possible.
10235 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10238 \begin_layout Quotation
10239 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10240 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10241 with your order, along with payment.
10244 \begin_layout Quotation
10245 We thank you again for your patience.
10248 \begin_layout Address
10250 \begin_inset Newline newline
10257 \begin_layout Quotation
10258 That ends that example!
10261 \begin_layout Standard
10262 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10263 gives you a lot of power with just
10265 We could have easily nested an
10286 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10289 \begin_layout Subsection
10291 \begin_inset Index idx
10294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10295 Nesting ! Separation
10301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10303 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10311 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10313 For example you need two different enumerations:
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Enumerate
10330 \begin_layout Standard
10331 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10337 \begin_layout Itemize
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10344 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 \begin_layout Standard
10363 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10364 list item and use the menu
10366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10367 Start New Environment
10370 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10372 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10375 arg "paragraph-break"
10379 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10380 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10381 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10382 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10389 arg "paragraph-break"
10392 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10395 \begin_layout Section
10396 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10397 \begin_inset Index idx
10400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10409 \begin_layout Standard
10410 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10411 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10413 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10414 be broken at the end of a line.
10415 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10419 \begin_layout Subsection
10421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10423 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10428 \begin_inset Index idx
10431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10442 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10443 ) not to break the line at
10445 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10448 \begin_layout Quote
10449 Further documentation is given in section
10450 \begin_inset Newline newline
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10464 \begin_layout Standard
10465 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10480 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10489 A protected space is set with
10491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10494 \begin_inset space ~
10502 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10508 \begin_layout Subsection
10510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10512 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10517 \begin_inset Index idx
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10521 Spacing ! Horizontal
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 The length units are listed in Appendix
10538 \begin_inset space ~
10542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10544 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10555 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10560 \begin_inset Index idx
10563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10564 Spaces ! Inter-word
10572 \begin_layout Standard
10573 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10574 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10575 at the ends of sentences.
10576 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10577 automatically takes care about this.
10578 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10579 followed by a period; see section
10580 \begin_inset space ~
10584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10586 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10591 To insert a normal space, select
10593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10596 \begin_inset space ~
10604 arg "space-insert normal"
10610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10614 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10619 \begin_inset Index idx
10622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10631 \begin_layout Standard
10633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10640 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10650 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10651 inside abbreviations:
10654 \begin_layout Quote
10656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10660 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10663 \begin_layout Standard
10664 or between values and units.
10665 Compare for example this:
10666 \begin_inset Newline newline
10670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10674 \begin_inset Newline newline
10677 10 kg (normal space
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10694 arg "space-insert thin"
10700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 You can also insert the following space types:
10708 \begin_layout Description
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10717 space A line with a
10718 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10722 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10726 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10729 negative thin space between the arrows.
10732 \begin_layout Description
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_inset space ~
10741 space A line with a
10742 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10746 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10750 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10753 negative medium space between the arrows.
10756 \begin_layout Description
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10765 space A line with a
10766 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10770 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10777 negative thick space between the arrows.
10780 \begin_layout Description
10782 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10790 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10794 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10798 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10802 \begin_inset space ~
10806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10809 em) space between the arrows.
10812 \begin_layout Description
10814 \begin_inset space ~
10818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10826 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10830 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10834 \begin_inset space ~
10838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10841 em) space between the arrows.
10844 \begin_layout Description
10846 \begin_inset space ~
10850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10854 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10858 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10862 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10866 \begin_inset space ~
10870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10873 em) space between the arrows.
10876 \begin_layout Description
10878 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10886 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10898 cm space between the arrows.
10901 \begin_layout Standard
10903 \begin_inset space ~
10907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10909 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10913 lists the different space sizes.
10916 \begin_layout Standard
10917 \begin_inset Float table
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10928 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10932 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10942 \begin_inset Tabular
10943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10944 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11062 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11221 \begin_inset Index idx
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_layout Standard
11234 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11235 feature for adding extra space
11236 in a uniform fashion.
11237 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11238 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11239 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11240 equally between themselves.
11243 \begin_layout Standard
11244 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11247 \begin_layout Quote
11249 This is on the left side
11250 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11253 This is on the right
11256 \begin_layout Quote
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11263 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11269 \begin_layout Quote
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11280 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11286 \begin_layout Standard
11287 That was an example in the
11293 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11304 is one in a standard paragraph.
11305 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11309 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11316 \begin_inset space ~
11321 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11324 \begin_layout Standard
11326 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11330 \begin_inset space ~
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11338 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11348 \begin_layout Standard
11350 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11354 \begin_inset space ~
11360 \begin_layout Standard
11362 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11366 \begin_inset space ~
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11374 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11386 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11390 \begin_inset space ~
11396 \begin_layout Standard
11397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11405 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11409 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11411 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11412 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11416 option in the space dialog.
11424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11428 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11433 \begin_inset Index idx
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11447 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11450 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11454 What is correct English?:
11455 \begin_inset Newline newline
11459 \begin_inset Newline newline
11463 \begin_inset space ~
11466 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11467 \begin_inset Newline newline
11471 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11482 \begin_inset Newline newline
11486 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11497 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11503 \begin_layout Standard
11505 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11522 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11525 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11529 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11546 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11555 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11556 That is why it is named
11557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11565 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11566 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11570 \begin_layout Subsection
11572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11574 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11579 \begin_inset Index idx
11582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11591 \begin_layout Standard
11592 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11595 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11597 \begin_inset space ~
11603 There you find the following sizes:
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11619 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11620 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11625 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11628 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11636 \begin_inset Index idx
11639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11640 Document ! Settings
11645 for the paragraph separation.
11646 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11657 \begin_layout Standard
11663 \begin_inset Index idx
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11673 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11678 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11679 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11688 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11697 s are described in section
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11704 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11713 If there are several
11717 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11718 You can therefore use
11722 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11730 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11731 \begin_inset space ~
11735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11737 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11744 \begin_layout Standard
11745 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11756 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11768 \begin_layout Subsection
11769 Paragraph Alignment
11770 \begin_inset Index idx
11773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11774 Paragraph ! Alignment
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11785 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11788 dialog (toolbar button
11791 arg "layout-paragraph"
11795 There are five possibilities:
11798 \begin_layout Itemize
11806 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11812 \begin_layout Itemize
11820 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11826 \begin_layout Itemize
11834 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11840 \begin_layout Itemize
11848 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11854 \begin_layout Itemize
11862 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11868 \begin_layout Standard
11869 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11870 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11871 the left and right margins.
11872 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11877 This paragraph is right aligned,
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11882 this one is centered,
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11887 this one is left aligned.
11890 \begin_layout Subsection
11892 \begin_inset Index idx
11895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11896 Page breaks ! Forced
11902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11904 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11911 \begin_layout Standard
11912 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11913 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11914 force a page break where you want one.
11915 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11916 is good at page breaking.
11917 Only if you use a lot of
11921 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11922 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11925 \begin_layout Standard
11926 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11927 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11931 have to change the page breaking.
11934 \begin_layout Standard
11935 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11937 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11942 \begin_inset space ~
11948 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11950 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11951 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 \begin_inset space ~
11958 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11960 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11961 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11964 \begin_layout Standard
11965 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11966 at the top of a page.
11967 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11969 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11970 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11971 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11975 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11979 to learn more about
11986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11990 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11995 \begin_inset Index idx
11998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11999 Page breaks ! Clear
12007 \begin_layout Standard
12008 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12009 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12010 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12011 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12012 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12015 \begin_layout Standard
12016 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12019 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12027 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12030 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12032 \begin_inset space ~
12036 \begin_inset space ~
12041 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12042 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12045 \begin_layout Subsection
12047 \begin_inset Index idx
12050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12059 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12067 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12069 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12072 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12078 \begin_inset space ~
12086 arg "newline-insert newline"
12090 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12099 \begin_inset space ~
12107 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12110 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12112 This is useful to avoid
12113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12120 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12125 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12127 very good at line breaking.
12128 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12129 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12136 reference "sec:Quote"
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Verse"
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12157 \begin_layout Subsection
12159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12161 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12166 \begin_inset Index idx
12169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12180 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12203 you can insert horizontal lines.
12204 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12205 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12206 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12222 \begin_layout Section
12223 Characters and Symbols
12226 \begin_layout Standard
12227 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12228 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12229 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12237 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12241 for information on how this is done.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12250 dialog via the menu
12252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12253 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 \begin_layout Standard
12260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12268 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12269 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12271 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12279 \begin_layout Section
12280 Fonts and Text Styles
12281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12283 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12290 \begin_layout Subsection
12292 \begin_inset Index idx
12295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12304 \begin_layout Standard
12305 There are two types of fonts:
12308 \begin_layout Description
12310 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset Index idx
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12323 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12328 characters) in the font.
12329 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12330 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12331 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12332 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12333 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12334 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12335 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12336 \begin_inset Newline newline
12339 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12340 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12341 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12342 sizes than at small ones.
12343 \begin_inset Newline newline
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12365 \begin_layout Description
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12371 \begin_inset Index idx
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12381 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12382 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12383 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12384 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12385 image manipulation program.
12386 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12387 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12391 pixels high up to 34
12392 \begin_inset space ~
12395 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12396 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12397 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12399 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12400 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12401 \begin_inset Newline newline
12404 Bitmap fonts are named
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12412 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12415 \begin_layout Standard
12416 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12417 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12418 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12419 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12420 use scalable fonts.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12427 \begin_layout Standard
12428 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12429 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12430 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12431 font to emphasize text, you use an
12432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12440 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12442 In \SpecialChar LyX
12443 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12447 \begin_layout Subsection
12450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12452 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12459 \begin_layout Standard
12460 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12461 used its own fonts.
12462 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12463 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12466 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12467 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12468 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12469 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12470 to a word processor.
12471 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12472 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 files are very portable across
12474 different machines.
12475 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12476 has increased a lot
12477 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12480 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12488 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12493 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12494 code in the document
12495 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12498 \begin_layout Standard
12499 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12500 engines that are also able directly
12501 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12503 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12505 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12507 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12508 that is installed on your system.
12509 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12512 \begin_layout Standard
12513 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12521 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12522 es; so you might have to experiment.
12530 \begin_layout Subsection
12531 Document Font and Font size
12532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12534 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12539 \begin_inset Index idx
12542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12561 \begin_layout Standard
12562 You can set the document fonts in the
12564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12568 \begin_inset Index idx
12571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12572 Document ! Settings
12582 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12583 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12586 \begin_inset space ~
12595 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12597 \begin_inset space ~
12600 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12608 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12609 This requires that you use
12621 as the output format, i.
12622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12626 \begin_inset space \space{}
12629 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12630 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12631 installed (see section
12632 \begin_inset space ~
12636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12638 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12643 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12645 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12646 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12648 \begin_inset space ~
12651 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12652 cannot determine the family.
12653 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12654 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12657 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12661 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12662 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12667 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12674 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12701 European Computer Modern
12704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12711 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12714 \begin_layout Standard
12723 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12724 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12732 \begin_inset space ~
12737 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12743 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12744 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12747 \begin_layout Itemize
12751 \begin_inset space ~
12756 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12769 \begin_inset space ~
12774 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12775 community in order to replace
12779 as the default font.
12780 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12781 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12784 \begin_inset space ~
12797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12798 One difference is improved kerning.
12806 \begin_layout Itemize
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset space ~
12819 fonts in (the rare) case that
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12827 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12842 Virtual means that it
12843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12854 -glyphs from other fonts.
12855 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12877 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12883 \begin_inset Index idx
12886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12888 -packages ! aeguill
12893 with the document preamble line
12894 \begin_inset Newline newline
12901 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12902 \begin_inset Newline newline
12907 will fix the guillemet problem.
12912 and that accented characters are not
12916 glyph, but built of
12920 characters, the accent and the letter.
12921 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12927 If you search for example for the French word
12928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12935 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12944 and not for the glyph
12945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12949 \begin_inset space ~
12953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12959 \begin_layout Itemize
12960 If you do not like the look of
12968 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12989 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12993 serif and typewriter fonts,
12997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12998 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13005 \begin_inset space ~
13014 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13019 \begin_inset space \space{}
13027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13031 \begin_inset space \space{}
13037 \begin_inset space ~
13045 \begin_inset space ~
13055 but you can also select your own.
13056 \begin_inset Newline newline
13059 The differences between roman,
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13071 fonts are explained in section
13072 \begin_inset space ~
13076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13078 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13083 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 \begin_inset space ~
13094 was originally designed for newspapers.
13095 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13096 into the small newspaper columns.
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13105 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13108 \begin_layout Standard
13109 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13122 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13127 depends on the class you are using.
13128 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13131 \begin_layout Standard
13132 Note that the font size is the
13137 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13138 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13139 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13140 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13143 \begin_inset space ~
13149 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13156 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13172 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13177 serif or typewriter.
13182 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13192 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13200 LaTeX font encoding
13202 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13203 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13209 \begin_inset Index idx
13212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13214 -packages ! fontenc
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13226 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13231 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13232 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13239 \begin_layout Standard
13240 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13242 Use Old Style Figures
13246 Use True Small Caps
13249 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13252 Use Old Style Figures
13254 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13256 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13264 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13268 Use True Small Caps
13270 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13271 of scaled capitals.
13272 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13273 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13276 \begin_layout Standard
13281 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13282 a font to display the script characters.
13286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13287 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13293 \begin_inset Index idx
13296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13303 So this has no effect for the document language
13317 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13329 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13334 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13335 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13337 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13342 dialog, see section
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13349 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13361 \begin_layout Subsection
13365 \begin_layout Standard
13366 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13367 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13369 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13370 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13371 choose a math font in the dialog
13373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13377 \begin_inset Index idx
13380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13381 Document ! Settings
13387 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13388 automatically selects a math font.
13389 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13390 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13399 \begin_inset space ~
13405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13410 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13411 document font is available.
13414 \begin_layout Standard
13415 Note that the math font will not be used for
13419 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13425 or by the insertion of the command
13432 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13433 \begin_inset space ~
13437 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13438 while the math characters do not.
13440 \begin_inset space ~
13443 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13446 \begin_inset space ~
13454 \begin_inset space ~
13459 in the document font settings.
13462 \begin_layout Standard
13463 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13464 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13465 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13466 font (in most cases
13467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13473 \begin_inset space ~
13479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13482 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13483 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13491 \begin_inset space ~
13497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13503 \begin_layout Subsection
13504 Using Different Character Styles
13505 \begin_inset Index idx
13508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13515 \begin_inset Index idx
13518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13527 \begin_layout Standard
13528 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13529 automatically changes the character style for certain
13530 paragraph environments.
13532 supports two character styles,
13541 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13545 \begin_layout Standard
13550 style, do one of the following:
13553 \begin_layout Itemize
13554 click on the toolbar button
13563 \begin_layout Itemize
13564 use the key binding
13573 \begin_layout Standard
13574 These commands are all toggles.
13579 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13582 \begin_layout Standard
13583 One typically uses the
13587 style for proper names.
13589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13596 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13604 \begin_layout Standard
13605 A more widely used character style is the
13610 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13617 \begin_layout Itemize
13618 clicking on the toolbar button
13627 \begin_layout Itemize
13628 using the keybindings
13637 \begin_layout Standard
13642 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13644 use a different font.
13647 \begin_layout Standard
13648 We've been using the
13652 style all over the place in this document.
13653 Here's one more example:
13656 \begin_layout Quotation
13659 Do not overuse character styles!
13662 \begin_layout Standard
13663 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13664 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13665 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13666 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13670 \begin_layout Standard
13671 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13681 \begin_inset space ~
13684 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13690 arg "dialog-show character"
13696 \begin_layout Subsection
13697 Fine-Tuning with the
13702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13704 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13709 \begin_inset Index idx
13712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13721 \begin_layout Standard
13722 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13724 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13725 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13726 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13727 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13728 from ordinary dialog.
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13732 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13733 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13734 \begin_inset Newline newline
13737 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13738 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13742 To use custom character styles, open the
13744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13746 \begin_inset space ~
13749 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13752 dialog or press the toolbar button
13755 arg "dialog-show character"
13759 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13760 font property that you can choose.
13761 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13764 \begin_inset space ~
13769 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13774 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13775 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13776 environments all at once.
13779 \begin_layout Standard
13780 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13783 \begin_inset space ~
13795 \begin_layout Labeling
13796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13810 The possible options are:
13814 \begin_layout Labeling
13815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13820 This is the Roman font family.
13821 Normally a serif font.
13822 It's also the default family.
13832 \begin_layout Labeling
13833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13837 \begin_inset space ~
13844 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13856 \begin_layout Labeling
13857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13864 This is the Typewriter font family.
13870 arg "font-typewriter"
13879 \begin_layout Labeling
13880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13885 This corresponds to the print weight.
13890 \begin_layout Labeling
13891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13896 This is the Medium font series.
13897 It's also the default series.
13900 \begin_layout Labeling
13901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13908 This is the Bold font series.
13921 \begin_layout Labeling
13922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13927 As the name implies.
13932 \begin_layout Labeling
13933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13938 This is the Upright font shape.
13939 It's also the default shape.
13942 \begin_layout Labeling
13943 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13957 s the Italic font shape
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13971 This is the Slanted font shape
13973 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13974 , this is different from italic).
13977 \begin_layout Labeling
13978 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13982 \begin_inset space ~
13989 This is the Small caps font shape
13996 \begin_layout Labeling
13997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14002 Alters the text color.
14003 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14007 \begin_inset space ~
14012 , which means that the document default color set in
14014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14021 \begin_inset space ~
14026 is used, you can choose between
14103 \begin_inset Index idx
14106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14115 \begin_layout Labeling
14116 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14122 the language of the document.
14123 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14124 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14126 \begin_inset Newline newline
14129 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14131 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14132 When using the spell checking (see section
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14139 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14143 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14146 \begin_layout Labeling
14147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14152 Alters the size of the font.
14153 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14154 proportional to the document font size.
14155 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14156 the details, but a general description of what
14162 \begin_layout Labeling
14163 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14184 arg "font-size tiny"
14190 \begin_layout Labeling
14191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14212 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14218 \begin_layout Labeling
14219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14240 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14246 \begin_layout Labeling
14247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14268 arg "font-size small"
14274 \begin_layout Labeling
14275 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14289 It's also the default size.
14293 arg "font-size normal"
14299 \begin_layout Labeling
14300 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14321 arg "font-size large"
14327 \begin_layout Labeling
14328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14349 arg "font-size larger"
14355 \begin_layout Labeling
14356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14377 arg "font-size largest"
14383 \begin_layout Labeling
14384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14405 arg "font-size huge"
14411 \begin_layout Labeling
14412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14433 arg "font-size giant"
14439 \begin_layout Labeling
14440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14465 arg "font-size increase"
14471 \begin_layout Labeling
14472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14477 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14497 arg "font-size decrease"
14504 \begin_layout Standard
14509 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14510 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14512 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14513 — use those instead.
14514 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14517 \begin_layout Labeling
14518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14523 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14528 \begin_layout Labeling
14529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14536 This is text with emphasize on
14539 This might seem like the same as
14543 , but it is actually a bit different.
14549 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14551 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14554 \begin_layout Labeling
14555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14562 This is text with Underbar on.
14568 arg "font-underline"
14574 \begin_inset Newline newline
14579 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14580 when you could not change fonts.
14581 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14582 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14583 because some people
14587 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14595 \begin_inset space ~
14602 This is text with Double underbar on.
14608 arg "font-underunderline"
14612 \begin_inset Newline newline
14615 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14616 about double underbar.
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14624 \begin_inset space ~
14631 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14637 arg "font-underwave"
14641 \begin_inset Newline newline
14644 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14645 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14648 \begin_layout Labeling
14649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14656 This is text with Strikeout on.
14662 arg "font-strikeout"
14666 \begin_inset Newline newline
14669 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14670 changed in the meantime.
14673 \begin_layout Labeling
14674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14681 This is text with Noun on.
14688 , this is a logical attribute.
14689 Normally it's equivalent to
14692 \begin_inset space ~
14701 \begin_layout Standard
14702 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14703 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14707 \begin_inset space ~
14710 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14716 arg "dialog-show character"
14719 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14720 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14723 arg "textstyle-apply"
14727 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14731 \begin_layout Standard
14732 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14739 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14740 (suppose you just set the shape to
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14759 \begin_inset space ~
14771 \begin_layout Standard
14772 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14780 \begin_inset space ~
14792 \begin_layout Itemize
14798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14805 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14823 \begin_inset Newline newline
14827 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14841 \begin_inset Note Note
14844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14845 For more on phantoms see section
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14852 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14862 \begin_inset Newline newline
14868 \begin_layout Itemize
14873 fonts use characters with serifs.
14874 These are the small
14875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14882 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14883 The following example shows the difference:
14884 \begin_inset Newline newline
14888 \begin_inset Newline newline
14893 text without serifs
14896 \begin_inset Newline newline
14899 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14900 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14907 \begin_layout Itemize
14912 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14913 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14914 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14917 \begin_layout Standard
14918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14925 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14926 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14929 \begin_inset space ~
14934 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14935 the property to be removed.
14936 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14937 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14938 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14956 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14957 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14965 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14969 \begin_inset space ~
14974 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14985 If you, for example, set
14986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15004 \begin_inset space ~
15009 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15018 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15021 \begin_layout Standard
15022 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15023 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15026 \begin_layout Section
15027 Printing and Previewing
15030 \begin_layout Subsection
15034 \begin_layout Standard
15035 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15036 using \SpecialChar LyX
15037 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15038 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15039 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15040 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15042 Additional Features
15047 \begin_layout Standard
15049 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15052 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15053 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15054 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15058 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15059 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15060 to turn your writing into printable output.
15061 This happens in two stages:
15064 \begin_layout Enumerate
15065 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15066 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15068 a file with the extension,
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15083 \begin_layout Enumerate
15084 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15085 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15086 to use the commands in the
15090 file to produce printable output.
15093 \begin_layout Subsection
15094 Output file formats
15095 \begin_inset Index idx
15098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15107 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15115 Simple text (ASCII)
15116 \begin_inset Index idx
15119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15120 File formats ! ASCII
15128 \begin_layout Standard
15129 This file type has the extension
15130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15146 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15153 \begin_layout Standard
15154 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15156 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15157 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15159 \begin_inset space ~
15165 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15166 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15167 bibliography (section
15168 \begin_inset space ~
15172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15174 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15179 If your document includes such material, use
15181 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15182 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15188 \begin_inset space ~
15192 \begin_inset space ~
15200 \begin_inset space ~
15204 \begin_inset space ~
15210 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15211 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15217 \begin_inset Index idx
15220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15221 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15230 \begin_layout Standard
15231 This file type has the extension
15232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15243 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15246 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15248 -Errors or to process it manually
15249 with console commands.
15250 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15251 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15252 's temporary directory whenever you
15253 view or export your document.
15256 \begin_layout Standard
15257 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15258 -file using the menu
15260 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15261 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15265 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15266 export variants are explained in section
15267 \begin_inset space ~
15271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15273 reference "subsec:Export"
15280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15282 \begin_inset Index idx
15285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15294 \begin_layout Standard
15295 This file type has the extension
15296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15316 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15317 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15318 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15323 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15324 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15325 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15326 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15327 when you view the DVI.
15328 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15331 \begin_layout Standard
15332 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15340 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15341 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15343 \begin_inset space ~
15349 The latter option uses the program
15351 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15357 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15360 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15361 font access (see section
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15368 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15373 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15374 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15379 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15381 \begin_inset Index idx
15384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15385 File formats ! PostScript
15393 \begin_layout Standard
15394 This file type has the extension
15395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 PostScript was developed by the company
15411 as a printer language.
15412 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15414 PostScript can be seen as a
15415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15418 programming language
15419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15427 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15434 \begin_inset Index idx
15437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15439 -packages ! pstricks
15449 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15452 \begin_layout Standard
15453 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15457 Encapsulated PostScript
15458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15461 (EPS, file extension
15462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15474 As \SpecialChar LyX
15475 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15476 convert them in the background to EPS.
15477 If, for example, you have 50
15478 \begin_inset space ~
15481 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15483 \begin_inset space ~
15486 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15487 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15489 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15490 EPS to avoid this problem.
15493 \begin_layout Standard
15494 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15496 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15497 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15505 \begin_inset Index idx
15508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15515 \begin_inset Index idx
15518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15527 \begin_layout Standard
15528 This file type has the extension
15529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15545 Portable Document Format
15546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15553 was derived from PostScript.
15554 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15564 looks exactly the same.
15567 \begin_layout Standard
15568 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15572 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15576 (JPG, file extension
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15604 Portable Network Graphics
15605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15608 (PNG, file extension
15609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15621 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15622 converts them in the
15623 background to one of these formats.
15624 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15625 will slow down your workflow.
15626 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15629 \begin_layout Standard
15630 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15632 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15638 \begin_layout Description
15640 \begin_inset space ~
15643 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15647 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15650 \begin_layout Description
15652 \begin_inset space ~
15659 ) This uses the program
15661 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15664 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15667 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15670 is a new engine, derived from
15674 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15675 access (see section
15676 \begin_inset space ~
15680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15682 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15687 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15688 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15693 \begin_layout Description
15695 \begin_inset space ~
15702 ) This uses the program
15707 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15713 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15714 font access (see section
15715 \begin_inset space ~
15719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15721 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15726 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15727 vertically written Japanese.
15730 \begin_layout Description
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15735 (cropped) This is the same as
15738 \begin_inset space ~
15743 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15744 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15745 to generate good-looking
15746 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15749 \begin_layout Description
15751 \begin_inset space ~
15754 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15758 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15762 \begin_layout Description
15764 \begin_inset space ~
15767 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15771 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15772 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15776 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15777 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15784 \begin_inset space ~
15793 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15794 works without problems.
15795 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15796 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15800 \begin_inset space ~
15808 \begin_inset space ~
15813 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15823 \begin_inset Index idx
15826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15827 FileFormats ! XHTML
15833 \begin_inset Index idx
15836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15845 \begin_layout Standard
15846 This file type has the extension
15847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15859 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15860 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15861 When \SpecialChar LyX
15862 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15863 suitable for the purpose.
15864 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15867 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15870 between different formats, which are described in section
15872 Math Output in XHTML
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15885 \begin_layout Standard
15886 XHTML output remains
15887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15894 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15895 features are supported yet.
15899 and the World Wide Web
15903 Additional Features
15905 manual, for more information.
15908 \begin_layout Standard
15909 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15911 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15912 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15918 \begin_layout Subsection
15920 \begin_inset Index idx
15923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15932 \begin_layout Standard
15933 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15934 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15943 or use the toolbar button
15950 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15951 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15958 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15962 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15970 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15975 Further output formats can be selected via
15977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15978 View (Other Formats)
15980 or the toolbar button
15989 \begin_layout Standard
15990 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15991 viewer window using the menu
15993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15998 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15999 Update (Other Formats)
16004 \begin_layout Standard
16005 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16008 To have a real output, export your document.
16011 \begin_layout Section
16012 A few Words about Typography
16013 \begin_inset Index idx
16016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16025 \begin_layout Subsection
16026 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16027 \begin_inset Index idx
16030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16037 \begin_inset Index idx
16040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16049 \begin_layout Standard
16050 In \SpecialChar LyX
16052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16063 character comes in four lengths: the
16075 , and the minus sign:
16076 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 \begin_inset Tabular
16084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16085 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16086 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16087 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16088 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16089 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16118 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16158 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16185 \begin_inset space ~
16188 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16195 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16222 \begin_inset space ~
16225 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16246 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16280 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16286 \begin_layout Standard
16287 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16299 character multiple times in a row.
16300 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16301 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16334 \begin_layout Standard
16335 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16336 math mode and has a length of its own.
16337 Here are some examples:
16340 \begin_layout Enumerate
16341 line- and page-breaks
16342 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16352 \begin_layout Enumerate
16354 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16364 \begin_layout Enumerate
16365 Oh — there's a dash.
16366 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16376 \begin_layout Enumerate
16377 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16381 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16391 \begin_layout Subsection
16393 \begin_inset Index idx
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16405 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16412 \begin_layout Standard
16413 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16414 but automatically in the output.
16415 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16421 \begin_inset Index idx
16424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16431 following the rules of the document language.
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16436 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16440 font and with unusual constructs, like
16441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16450 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16451 This is done with the menu
16453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16454 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16456 \begin_inset space ~
16462 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16464 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16469 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16470 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16481 would then see the hyphen
16482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16489 as a hyphenation possibility.
16490 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16491 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16492 as described in section
16493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16496 Prevent Hyphenation
16497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16503 \begin_inset space ~
16511 \begin_layout Subsection
16513 \begin_inset Index idx
16516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16526 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16529 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16536 \begin_layout Standard
16537 When \SpecialChar LyX
16538 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16539 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16541 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16547 appropriate amount of space.
16548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16551 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16553 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16554 gets after another word.
16557 \begin_layout Standard
16558 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16559 not work in all cases.
16561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16572 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16573 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16577 Here are some examples of
16581 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16584 \begin_layout Itemize
16589 \begin_layout Itemize
16594 \begin_layout Standard
16595 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16598 \begin_layout Itemize
16600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16604 this is too much space!
16607 \begin_layout Itemize
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16613 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16616 \begin_layout Standard
16617 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16620 \begin_layout Enumerate
16624 \begin_inset space ~
16629 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16636 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16641 \begin_inset Index idx
16644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16645 Spaces ! inter-word
16653 \begin_layout Enumerate
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16662 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16663 \begin_inset space ~
16667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16669 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16674 \begin_inset Index idx
16677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16686 \begin_layout Enumerate
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16698 \begin_inset space ~
16705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16707 \begin_inset space ~
16712 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16713 This function is also bound to
16716 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16722 \begin_layout Standard
16723 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16726 \begin_layout Itemize
16728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16732 \begin_inset space \space{}
16735 this is too much space!
16738 \begin_layout Itemize
16739 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16743 \begin_layout Standard
16744 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16745 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 will take care of this.
16750 \begin_layout Standard
16751 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16755 \begin_inset space ~
16761 feature described in the section
16763 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16768 Additional Features
16773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16775 \begin_inset Index idx
16778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16779 Typography ! Quotes
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16819 \begin_layout Standard
16821 usually sets quotes correctly.
16822 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16823 and use a closing quote at the end.
16825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16833 The keyboard character,
16837 , generates this automatically.
16840 \begin_layout Standard
16841 You can specify what character the
16845 key produces using the submenu
16851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16855 \begin_inset Index idx
16858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16859 Document ! Settings
16869 There are six choices:
16872 \begin_layout Labeling
16873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16896 \begin_layout Labeling
16897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16900 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16904 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16910 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16914 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16920 \begin_layout Labeling
16921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16924 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16928 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16934 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16938 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16944 \begin_layout Labeling
16945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16948 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16952 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16958 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16962 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16968 \begin_layout Labeling
16969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16972 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16976 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16982 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16986 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16992 \begin_layout Labeling
16993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16996 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17000 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17006 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17010 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17016 \begin_layout Standard
17017 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17020 arg "quote-insert single"
17026 \begin_layout Subsection
17028 \begin_inset Index idx
17031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17032 Typography ! Ligatures
17038 \begin_inset Index idx
17041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17072 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17079 \begin_layout Standard
17080 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17081 print them as single characters.
17082 These groups are known as
17087 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17088 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17090 Here are the standard ligatures:
17093 \begin_layout Itemize
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17101 \begin_layout Itemize
17105 \begin_layout Itemize
17109 \begin_layout Itemize
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17117 \begin_layout Standard
17118 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17119 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17127 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17143 To break a ligature, use
17145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17146 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17148 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17166 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17183 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 \begin_layout Subsection
17193 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17195 \begin_inset Index idx
17198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17208 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17219 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17223 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17226 \begin_layout Description
17228 The name of the game.
17231 \begin_layout Description
17233 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17237 \begin_layout Description
17239 The \SpecialChar TeX
17240 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17244 \begin_layout Description
17245 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17246 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17251 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17257 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17265 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17266 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17267 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17268 converges to the number
17269 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17272 : The actual version is
17273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17281 , the previous one was
17282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17293 \begin_layout Subsection
17295 \begin_inset Index idx
17298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17307 \begin_layout Standard
17308 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17309 space between two words.
17310 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17320 for units use the menu
17322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17323 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17333 arg "space-insert thin"
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 Here is an example to show the differences:
17343 \begin_layout Standard
17344 \begin_inset Tabular
17345 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17346 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17347 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17355 \begin_inset space ~
17359 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17371 space between number and unit
17378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17387 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17399 half space between number and unit
17412 \begin_layout Subsection
17414 \begin_inset Index idx
17417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17418 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17426 \begin_layout Standard
17427 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17429 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17430 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17431 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17432 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17433 These bits of text became known as
17444 \begin_layout Standard
17445 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17446 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17447 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17448 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17449 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17450 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17451 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17452 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17453 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17454 \begin_inset Newline newline
17462 \begin_inset Newline newline
17470 \begin_inset Newline newline
17473 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17474 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17475 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17477 \begin_inset space ~
17481 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17483 key "latexcompanion"
17488 \begin_inset space ~
17492 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17498 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17499 's page break mechanism.
17502 \begin_layout Chapter
17503 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17506 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17513 \begin_layout Standard
17514 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17517 \begin_inset space ~
17523 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17526 \begin_layout Section
17528 \begin_inset Index idx
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17547 \begin_layout Standard
17549 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17552 \begin_layout Description
17555 \begin_inset space ~
17558 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17559 \begin_inset Newline newline
17563 \begin_inset Note Note
17566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17567 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17575 \begin_layout Description
17576 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17577 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17578 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17581 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17582 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17584 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset Newline newline
17594 \begin_inset Note Comment
17597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17598 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17607 \begin_layout Description
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17612 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17613 set in the document settings under
17615 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17617 \begin_inset space ~
17623 \begin_inset Newline newline
17627 \begin_inset Newline newline
17631 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17640 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17641 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17646 of a comment that appears in the output.
17652 \begin_inset Newline newline
17656 \begin_inset Newline newline
17659 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17662 \begin_layout Standard
17663 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17675 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17678 \begin_layout Section
17680 \begin_inset Index idx
17683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17692 name "sec:Footnotes"
17699 \begin_layout Standard
17701 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17707 or the toolbar button
17710 arg "footnote-insert"
17722 \begin_inset Graphics
17723 filename clipart/footnote.png
17732 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17733 's representation of your footnote.
17743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17762 label, the box will
17766 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17767 Clicking on the box label again will close
17780 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17781 and click on the footnote
17796 \begin_layout Standard
17797 Here is an example footnote:
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17816 position where the footnote box is placed.
17817 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17818 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17819 according to the document class.
17821 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17822 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17828 ey are described in the
17831 \begin_inset space ~
17839 \begin_layout Section
17841 \begin_inset Index idx
17844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17853 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17860 \begin_layout Standard
17861 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17863 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17867 \begin_inset space ~
17872 or the toolbar button
17875 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17901 appearing within your text.
17902 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17903 's representation of your margin
17912 \begin_layout Standard
17913 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17917 \begin_inset Marginal
17920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17922 This is a marginal note.
17930 \begin_layout Standard
17931 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17932 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17933 pages, right on odd pages.
17936 \begin_layout Standard
17937 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17940 \begin_inset space ~
17948 \begin_inset space ~
17956 \begin_layout Section
17957 Graphics and Images
17958 \begin_inset Index idx
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17968 \begin_inset Index idx
17971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17980 name "sec:Graphics"
17987 \begin_layout Standard
17988 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17989 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17992 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18001 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18004 \begin_layout Standard
18005 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18010 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18011 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18013 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18014 \begin_inset space ~
18018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18020 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18027 \begin_layout Standard
18032 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18033 of the image in the output.
18034 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18038 \begin_inset space ~
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18059 \begin_inset space ~
18064 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18065 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18073 \begin_layout Standard
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18081 \begin_inset space ~
18086 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18087 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18089 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18099 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18100 with the image size is printed.
18103 \begin_layout Standard
18104 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18105 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18107 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18110 \begin_layout Standard
18112 \begin_inset Graphics
18113 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18121 \begin_layout Standard
18122 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18123 the image into a float, see section
18124 \begin_inset space ~
18128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18130 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18137 \begin_layout Subsection
18139 \begin_inset Index idx
18142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18151 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18158 \begin_layout Standard
18159 You can insert images in any known file format.
18160 But as we explained in section
18161 \begin_inset space ~
18165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18167 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18171 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18173 therefore uses the program
18177 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18178 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18179 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18180 \begin_inset space ~
18184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18186 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18193 \begin_layout Standard
18194 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18197 \begin_layout Description
18199 \begin_inset space ~
18202 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18203 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18204 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18208 Graphics Interchange Format
18209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18212 (GIF, file extension
18213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18225 \begin_inset Index idx
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18260 Portable Network Graphics
18261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18264 (PNG, file extension
18265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18277 \begin_inset Index idx
18280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18312 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18316 (JPG, file extension
18317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18341 \begin_inset Index idx
18344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18375 \begin_layout Description
18377 \begin_inset space ~
18380 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18382 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18383 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18384 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18385 \begin_inset Newline newline
18388 Scalable image formats can be
18389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18392 Scalable Vector Graphics
18393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18396 (SVG, file extension
18397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 \begin_inset Index idx
18412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18444 Encapsulated PostScript
18445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18448 (EPS, file extension
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18461 \begin_inset Index idx
18464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18496 Portable Document Format
18497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18500 (PDF, file extension
18501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18513 \begin_inset Index idx
18516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18531 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18532 result will not be scalable.
18533 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18547 \begin_layout Standard
18548 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18555 \begin_layout Subsection
18556 Grouping of Image Settings
18557 \begin_inset Index idx
18560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 Images ! Settings grouping
18569 \begin_layout Standard
18570 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18572 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18573 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18575 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18576 need to manually change each of them.
18580 \begin_layout Standard
18581 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18588 \begin_inset space ~
18600 \begin_inset space ~
18604 \begin_inset space ~
18610 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18611 and checking the name of the desired group.
18614 \begin_layout Section
18616 \begin_inset Index idx
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18635 \begin_layout Standard
18636 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18639 arg "tabular-insert"
18644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18648 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18649 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18650 from the rest of the table.
18651 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18652 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18654 Here is an example table:
18657 \begin_layout Standard
18659 \begin_inset Tabular
18660 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18661 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18662 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18663 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18664 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18865 \begin_layout Subsection
18869 \begin_layout Standard
18870 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18873 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18877 This brings up the table dialog.
18878 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18879 cursor is placed currently.
18880 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18881 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18882 done on all of your selection.
18885 \begin_layout Standard
18886 In addition to the table dialog, the
18889 \begin_inset space ~
18894 helps you in setting table properties.
18895 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18898 \begin_layout Standard
18902 \begin_inset space ~
18907 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18908 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18909 current cell respectively.
18910 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18912 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18913 of text, see section
18914 \begin_inset space ~
18918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18920 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18927 \begin_layout Standard
18928 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18929 using the check box
18938 This will merge the cells to
18942 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18943 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18944 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18945 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18946 in the last row without the upper border:
18949 \begin_layout Standard
18951 \begin_inset Tabular
18952 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18953 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18955 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19053 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19088 \begin_layout Standard
19089 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19090 -arguments for the table.
19091 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19092 explained in the chapter
19099 \begin_inset space ~
19105 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19106 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19107 but are visible in the output.
19110 \begin_layout Standard
19111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19119 Most DVI-viewers are
19123 able to display rotations.
19131 \begin_layout Standard
19136 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19141 adds lines for all cell borders.
19144 \begin_layout Subsection
19146 \begin_inset Index idx
19149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 Tables ! Longtables
19156 \begin_inset Index idx
19159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 \begin_layout Standard
19169 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19185 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19186 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19189 \begin_layout Description
19194 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19195 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19196 except for the first page, if
19199 \begin_inset space ~
19207 \begin_layout Description
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19220 \begin_layout Description
19225 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19226 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19227 except for the last page, if
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19238 \begin_layout Description
19242 \begin_inset space ~
19247 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19248 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19251 \begin_layout Description
19252 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19253 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19259 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19270 \begin_layout Standard
19271 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19272 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19273 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19279 In this context, first means first in this order:
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19299 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19302 \begin_layout Standard
19304 \begin_inset Tabular
19305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19306 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19307 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19308 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19309 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19310 <row endfirsthead="true">
19311 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19322 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19331 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <row endfirsthead="true">
19342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19362 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19374 <row endhead="true">
19375 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19386 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <row endhead="true">
19406 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19417 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 <row endfoot="true">
19439 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20431 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20440 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <row endlastfoot="true">
21421 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 \begin_layout Subsection
21460 \begin_inset Index idx
21463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21472 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21479 \begin_layout Standard
21480 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21481 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21482 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21483 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21487 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21490 \begin_layout Standard
21491 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21492 for the column in the table dialog.
21493 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21494 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21498 \begin_layout Standard
21500 \begin_inset Tabular
21501 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21502 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21503 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21504 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21505 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 This is longer now.
21655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21707 This is longer now.
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21738 \begin_layout Standard
21739 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21740 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21746 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21752 Selection with the mouse or with
21756 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21757 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21758 the selection from outside the table.
21761 \begin_layout Section
21763 \begin_inset Index idx
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21782 \begin_layout Subsection
21786 \begin_layout Standard
21787 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21788 have a fixed location.
21790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21797 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21805 \begin_inset space ~
21810 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21811 too many notes on the current page.
21814 \begin_layout Standard
21815 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21816 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21817 and pages without text.
21818 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21819 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21820 Floats are therefore numbered.
21821 Referencing is described in section
21822 \begin_inset space ~
21826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21828 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21835 \begin_layout Standard
21836 To insert a float, use the menu
21838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21842 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21843 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21845 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21846 \begin_inset Index idx
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21856 paragraph within the float.
21857 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21858 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21859 left-clicking on the box label.
21860 A closed float box looks like this:
21861 \begin_inset Graphics
21862 filename clipart/float.png
21867 – a gray button with a red label.
21870 \begin_layout Standard
21871 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21873 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21876 \begin_layout Subsection
21878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21880 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21885 \begin_inset Index idx
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 Floats ! Figure floats
21897 \begin_layout Standard
21899 \begin_inset space ~
21903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21905 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21909 was created using the menu
21911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21912 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21918 arg "float-insert figure"
21922 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21931 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21935 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21936 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21938 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21948 arg "layout-paragraph"
21954 \begin_layout Standard
21955 \begin_inset Float figure
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 \begin_inset Graphics
21963 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21978 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21982 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21995 \begin_layout Standard
21996 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21997 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22008 ) and refer to it using the menu
22010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22016 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22020 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22021 vague references like
22022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22029 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22030 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22040 For more about cross-references, see section
22041 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22047 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22054 \begin_layout Standard
22055 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22056 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22057 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22058 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22059 as described in section
22060 \begin_inset space ~
22064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22066 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22072 \begin_inset space ~
22076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22078 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22082 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22083 You can also set the images one below the other.
22085 \begin_inset space ~
22089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22091 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22098 reference "fig:Platypus"
22102 are the subfigures.
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset Float figure
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22116 \begin_inset Float figure
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22127 name "fig:Undefinable"
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 \begin_inset Graphics
22141 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22152 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22156 \begin_inset Float figure
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22167 name "fig:Platypus"
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 \begin_inset Graphics
22181 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22193 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22205 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22209 Two distorted images.
22222 \begin_layout Subsection
22224 \begin_inset Index idx
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 Floats ! Table floats
22236 \begin_layout Standard
22237 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22240 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22243 or the toolbar button
22246 arg "float-insert table"
22250 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22251 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22252 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22254 \begin_inset space ~
22258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22260 reference "tab:Table-float"
22267 \begin_layout Standard
22268 \begin_inset Float table
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22279 name "tab:Table-float"
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 \begin_inset Tabular
22294 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22295 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22296 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22298 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22449 \end{array}\right]$
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22491 \begin_layout Subsection
22493 \begin_inset Index idx
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 \begin_layout Standard
22507 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22508 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22509 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22511 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22519 \begin_inset space ~
22527 \begin_layout Section
22529 \begin_inset Index idx
22532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 \begin_layout Standard
22543 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22545 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22546 \begin_inset space \space{}
22553 \begin_layout Standard
22554 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22555 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22561 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22562 and its alignment within the page.
22565 \begin_layout Standard
22567 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22577 height_special "totalheight"
22582 backgroundcolor "none"
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22588 This is a minipage.
22589 The text is set in an italic style.
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22596 another formatting.
22604 \begin_layout Standard
22605 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22608 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22612 as described in section
22613 \begin_inset space ~
22617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22619 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22630 \begin_layout Standard
22631 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22641 height_special "totalheight"
22646 backgroundcolor "none"
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22650 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22651 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22657 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22661 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22671 height_special "totalheight"
22676 backgroundcolor "none"
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22681 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22689 \begin_layout Standard
22690 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22696 \begin_layout Standard
22697 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22699 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22706 \begin_inset space ~
22714 \begin_layout Chapter
22715 Mathematical Formulas
22716 \begin_inset Index idx
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 \begin_inset Index idx
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22760 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22773 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22776 \begin_layout Section
22778 \begin_inset Index idx
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 \begin_layout Standard
22791 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22804 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22806 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22807 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22808 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22816 \begin_layout Standard
22817 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22821 \begin_inset space ~
22826 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22829 \begin_layout Standard
22830 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22831 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22834 \begin_layout Standard
22835 This is a line with an inline formula
22836 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22842 \begin_layout Standard
22843 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22844 paragraph, like this one:
22845 \begin_inset Formula
22852 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22855 \begin_layout Standard
22857 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22859 For example, typing
22860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22873 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22874 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22878 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22881 \begin_inset space ~
22889 \begin_layout Subsection
22890 Navigating in Formulas
22891 \begin_inset Index idx
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 \begin_layout Standard
22904 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22905 achieved with the arrow keys.
22907 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22908 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22913 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22914 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22918 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22922 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22925 \end{array}\right]$
22933 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22938 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22939 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22942 \begin_layout Standard
22947 , printed in this document as
22948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22952 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22959 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22960 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22961 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22966 For example, if you want
22967 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22975 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22985 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22989 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22994 , since in the latter case only the
22997 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23002 will be under the square root sign:
23003 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23009 \begin_layout Standard
23010 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23012 \begin_inset Formula
23014 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23023 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23024 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23027 \begin_layout Subsection
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23032 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23033 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23037 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23038 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23039 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23040 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23041 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23045 \begin_layout Subsection
23046 Exponents and Subscripts
23047 \begin_inset Index idx
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 \begin_inset Index idx
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_layout Standard
23070 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23073 arg "math-superscript"
23079 arg "math-subscript"
23082 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23084 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23087 , type in a formula
23090 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23100 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23106 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23110 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23116 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23122 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23131 , you have to use an extra
23135 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23136 For example, if you want
23137 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23143 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23149 Subscripts are similar: To get
23150 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23156 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23164 \begin_layout Subsection
23166 \begin_inset Index idx
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 \begin_layout Standard
23179 Create a fraction either with the command
23185 or by using the icon
23188 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23194 \begin_inset space ~
23200 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23201 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23202 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23207 To move back up, press
23212 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23213 \begin_inset Formula
23215 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23218 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23226 \begin_layout Subsection
23228 \begin_inset Index idx
23231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 \begin_layout Standard
23241 Roots can be created using the
23244 \begin_inset space ~
23252 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23258 arg "math-insert \\root"
23280 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23286 always produces a square root.
23289 \begin_layout Subsection
23290 Operators with Limits
23291 \begin_inset Index idx
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 \begin_inset Index idx
23304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23313 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23320 \begin_layout Standard
23322 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23326 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23329 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23330 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23331 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23332 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23333 The sum operator will automatically place its
23334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23341 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23343 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23347 \begin_inset Formula
23349 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23354 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23358 \begin_layout Standard
23359 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23361 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23362 behind the operator and using the menu
23364 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23365 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23367 \begin_inset space ~
23371 \begin_inset space ~
23385 \begin_layout Standard
23386 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23395 \begin_inset Index idx
23398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 \begin_inset Formula
23407 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23412 which will place the
23413 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23425 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23426 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23432 \begin_layout Standard
23433 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23440 Have a look at section
23441 \begin_inset space ~
23445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23447 reference "subsec:Functions"
23451 for an explanation of function macros.
23454 \begin_layout Subsection
23456 \begin_inset Index idx
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23469 Most math symbols can be found in the
23472 \begin_inset space ~
23477 under one of several categories; including
23494 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23498 \begin_layout Standard
23499 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23500 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23501 don't have to use the
23504 \begin_inset space ~
23509 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23511 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23514 \begin_layout Subsection
23516 \begin_inset Index idx
23519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23535 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23541 \begin_inset space ~
23549 arg "math-insert \\space"
23553 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23554 For example, the sequence
23559 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23562 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23564 \begin_inset Graphics
23565 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23570 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23571 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23572 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23573 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23574 , because they are negative
23576 Here are two examples:
23579 \begin_layout Standard
23589 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23595 \begin_layout Standard
23605 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23611 \begin_layout Subsection
23613 \begin_inset Index idx
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23625 name "subsec:Functions"
23632 \begin_layout Standard
23636 \begin_inset space ~
23641 contains under the button
23644 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23647 a number of function macros, such as
23648 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23652 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23660 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23667 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23668 avoid confusions, because
23669 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23673 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23682 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23686 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23692 \begin_layout Standard
23693 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23694 are placed, as described in section
23695 \begin_inset space ~
23699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23701 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23708 \begin_layout Subsection
23710 \begin_inset Index idx
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 \begin_layout Standard
23723 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23725 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23726 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23727 commands, for example, to enter
23728 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23731 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23732 Our example is entered by typing
23737 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23744 \begin_inset space ~
23748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23750 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23754 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23757 \begin_layout Standard
23758 \begin_inset Float table
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23769 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23773 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 \begin_inset Tabular
23784 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23785 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23786 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23787 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23788 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23926 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23980 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24304 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24370 \begin_layout Standard
24371 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24382 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24385 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24389 \begin_layout Section
24390 Brackets and Delimiters
24391 \begin_inset Index idx
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 \begin_inset Index idx
24404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24413 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24420 \begin_layout Standard
24421 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24423 For some purposes, using just the keys
24428 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24429 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24430 toolbar delimiter icon
24433 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24437 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24438 \begin_inset Formula
24440 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24448 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24449 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24453 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24456 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24462 \begin_inset Formula
24464 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24472 \begin_layout Standard
24473 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24474 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24478 \begin_layout Standard
24479 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24480 left side and right side.
24481 If you use the option
24484 \begin_inset space ~
24489 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24490 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24492 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24497 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24498 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24501 \begin_layout Standard
24502 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24503 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24504 is to go inside the brackets.
24505 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24510 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24511 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24512 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24516 arg "math-delim ( )"
24522 \begin_layout Section
24523 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24524 \begin_inset Index idx
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 \begin_inset Index idx
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Index idx
24547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24556 \begin_layout Standard
24557 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24561 \begin_inset space ~
24569 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24573 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24574 Here is an example:
24575 \begin_inset Formula
24577 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24586 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24587 \begin_inset space ~
24591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24593 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24598 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24599 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24600 This alignment is set in the box
24605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24654 for every column as default.
24655 For example, the sequence
24656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24667 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24668 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24669 corresponds to the relevant column.
24670 The result will look like this:
24671 \begin_inset Formula
24674 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24675 column & has & has\,right\\
24676 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24685 \begin_layout Standard
24686 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24689 arg "newline-insert newline"
24692 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24693 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24698 or the math toolbar.
24701 \begin_layout Standard
24702 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24703 It can be created with the menu
24705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24706 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24708 \begin_inset space ~
24720 Here is an example:
24721 \begin_inset Formula
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24736 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24739 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24742 arg "newline-insert newline"
24746 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24751 arg "newline-insert newline"
24754 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24762 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24763 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24764 A new row is created by every further entry of
24767 arg "newline-insert newline"
24771 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24772 Here is an example:
24773 \begin_inset Formula
24775 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24776 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24781 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24782 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24783 \begin_inset Formula
24785 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24794 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24801 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24802 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24805 reference "eq:asquared"
24810 The other types are described in section
24811 \begin_inset space ~
24815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24817 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24824 \begin_layout Section
24825 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24826 \begin_inset Index idx
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 Math ! Formula numbering
24836 \begin_inset Index idx
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24840 Math ! Referencing formulas
24846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24848 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24856 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24859 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24861 \begin_inset space ~
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24873 arg "math-number-toggle"
24877 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24878 within parentheses.
24879 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24880 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24881 the document class.
24882 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24883 separated by a dot:
24884 \begin_inset Formula
24894 arg "math-number-toggle"
24897 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24898 You can only number displayed formulas.
24901 \begin_layout Standard
24902 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24905 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24907 \begin_inset space ~
24911 \begin_inset space ~
24919 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24922 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24923 \begin_inset Formula
24926 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24932 To number all lines use the shortcut
24935 arg "math-number-toggle"
24941 \begin_layout Standard
24942 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24945 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24946 A label is inserted with the menu
24948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24957 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24958 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24959 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24971 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24972 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24973 We inserted in the following example the label
24974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24981 in the second line:
24982 \begin_inset Formula
24984 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24985 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24990 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24991 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24992 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24996 \begin_inset space ~
25004 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25008 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25009 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25010 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25011 as the formula number:
25014 \begin_layout Standard
25015 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25018 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25025 \begin_layout Standard
25026 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25027 's cross-reference box are described in section
25028 \begin_inset space ~
25032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25034 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25039 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25047 \begin_layout Section
25048 User defined math macros
25049 \begin_inset Index idx
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 \begin_layout Standard
25063 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25064 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25065 Math macros are explained in section
25068 \begin_inset space ~
25080 \begin_layout Section
25084 \begin_layout Subsection
25086 \begin_inset Index idx
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25098 \begin_layout Standard
25099 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25100 To set a font in a formula, use the
25103 \begin_inset space ~
25111 arg "math-insert \\font"
25114 , or enter its command, listed in table
25115 \begin_inset space ~
25119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25121 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25128 \begin_layout Standard
25129 \begin_inset Float table
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25140 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25144 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Tabular
25155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25277 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25392 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 \begin_layout Standard
25427 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25435 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25451 \begin_layout Standard
25452 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25453 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25458 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25459 space when you need a space in the box.
25460 Here is an example where
25461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25472 denotes the set of numbers:
25473 \begin_inset Formula
25475 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25483 \begin_layout Standard
25484 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25485 You can, for example, put a character in
25494 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25498 \begin_inset Newline newline
25501 So it is better not to use this feature.
25504 \begin_layout Standard
25505 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25506 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25510 \begin_inset Newline newline
25513 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25519 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25520 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25533 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25536 \begin_layout Standard
25537 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25540 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25542 \begin_inset space ~
25550 \begin_layout Subsection
25552 \begin_inset Index idx
25555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 \begin_layout Standard
25565 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25567 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25575 \begin_inset space ~
25583 \begin_inset space ~
25591 arg "math-insert \\font"
25595 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25596 in black instead of blue.
25597 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25598 Here is an example:
25599 \begin_inset Formula
25602 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25603 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25612 \begin_layout Subsection
25614 \begin_inset Index idx
25617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25626 \begin_layout Standard
25627 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25628 automatically chosen in most situations.
25646 For most characters,
25654 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25655 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25660 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25661 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25662 thinks are appropriate.
25663 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25666 arg "math-insert \\style"
25670 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25671 For example, you can set
25672 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25675 , which is normally in
25684 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25688 The four styles are used in the following example:
25691 \begin_layout Standard
25692 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25696 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25700 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25704 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25712 is set in a particular size with the menu
25714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25716 \begin_inset space ~
25721 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25722 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25723 will be adjusted to correspond.
25724 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25735 \begin_layout Standard
25739 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25745 \begin_layout Section
25746 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25748 \begin_inset Index idx
25751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25758 \begin_inset Index idx
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25770 \begin_layout Standard
25772 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25773 that are in common use.
25776 \begin_layout Subsection
25777 Enabling AMS-Support
25780 \begin_layout Standard
25781 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25782 the document by selecting the checkbox
25785 \begin_inset space ~
25789 \begin_inset space ~
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25804 \begin_inset Index idx
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 Document ! Settings
25816 \begin_inset space ~
25822 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25823 -errors in formulas,
25824 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25827 \begin_layout Subsection
25829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25831 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25836 \begin_inset Index idx
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25848 \begin_layout Standard
25849 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25850 provides a selection of different formula types.
25852 allows you to choose between
25873 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25874 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25880 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25883 \begin_layout Chapter
25887 \begin_layout Section
25889 \begin_inset Index idx
25892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25901 name "sec:Cross-References"
25908 \begin_layout Standard
25909 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25910 's strengths is cross-references.
25911 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25913 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25914 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25915 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25918 \begin_layout Enumerate
25922 \begin_layout Enumerate
25923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25925 name "enu:Second-item"
25932 \begin_layout Enumerate
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25937 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25942 or by pressing the toolbar button
25949 A gray label box like this:
25950 \begin_inset Graphics
25951 filename clipart/label.png
25956 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25958 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25993 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25994 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26010 \begin_layout Standard
26011 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26016 or the toolbar button
26019 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26023 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26024 \begin_inset Graphics
26025 filename clipart/reference.png
26030 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26032 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26045 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26049 \begin_layout Standard
26050 As an alternative to
26052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26055 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26060 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26061 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26077 \begin_inset space ~
26081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26083 reference "enu:Second-item"
26090 \begin_layout Standard
26091 It is recommended to use a protected space
26095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 described in section
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26103 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26112 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26113 line breaks between them.
26116 \begin_layout Standard
26117 There are six formats of cross-references:
26120 \begin_layout Description
26121 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26124 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26131 \begin_layout Description
26132 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26133 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26145 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26152 \begin_layout Description
26153 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26154 \begin_inset space ~
26158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26159 LatexCommand pageref
26160 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26167 \begin_layout Description
26169 \begin_inset space ~
26173 \begin_inset space ~
26176 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26178 LatexCommand vpageref
26179 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26184 \begin_inset Newline newline
26187 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26188 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26189 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26190 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26191 it prints “on the next page”.
26192 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26195 \begin_layout Description
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26205 \begin_inset space ~
26208 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26211 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26216 \begin_inset Newline newline
26219 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26225 ; otherwise it behaves like
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26233 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_layout Description
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26247 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26248 \begin_inset Newline newline
26252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26260 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26270 \begin_inset Index idx
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 -packages ! prettyref
26281 \begin_inset Index idx
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 -packages ! refstyle
26297 \begin_inset Newline newline
26300 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26301 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26304 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26308 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26309 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26317 is the default and preferred because
26321 supports only English documents.
26322 The format is specified by using the command
26334 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26335 preamble of the document.
26336 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26349 ) can be done with this command
26350 \begin_inset Newline newline
26357 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26362 \begin_inset Newline newline
26365 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26369 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26376 \begin_layout Description
26378 \begin_inset space ~
26381 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26383 LatexCommand nameref
26384 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26391 \begin_layout Standard
26392 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26393 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26395 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26399 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26403 \begin_layout Standard
26404 You can only use the style
26408 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26412 is always possible.
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26416 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26417 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26419 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26420 \begin_inset space ~
26424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26426 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26438 \begin_inset space ~
26442 \begin_inset space ~
26447 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26448 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26451 \begin_inset space ~
26456 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26457 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26460 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26466 \begin_layout Standard
26467 You can change labels at any time.
26468 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26469 do not need to think about this.
26472 \begin_layout Standard
26473 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26475 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26479 \begin_layout Standard
26480 References are described in detail in the section
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26495 \begin_inset space ~
26503 \begin_layout Section
26504 Table of Contents and other Listings
26505 \begin_inset Index idx
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 \begin_inset Index idx
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26534 \begin_layout Subsection
26536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26538 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26545 \begin_layout Standard
26546 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26549 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26555 \begin_inset space ~
26561 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26563 If you click on it, the
26567 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26568 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26569 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26571 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26578 that is described in section
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26585 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26592 \begin_layout Standard
26593 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26594 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26596 \begin_inset space ~
26600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26602 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26606 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26608 \begin_inset space ~
26612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26614 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26618 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26620 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26623 \begin_layout Subsection
26624 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26627 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26634 \begin_layout Standard
26635 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26637 You can insert them via the
26639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26643 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26646 \begin_layout Section
26647 URLs and Hyperlinks
26648 \begin_inset Index idx
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 \begin_inset Index idx
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_layout Subsection
26672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26681 \begin_layout Standard
26682 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26693 \begin_inset Flex URL
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26707 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26713 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26717 \begin_layout Standard
26718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26726 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26735 \begin_layout Subsection
26737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26739 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26746 \begin_layout Standard
26747 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26752 or with the toolbar button
26759 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26768 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26769 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26770 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26772 name "LyX's homepage"
26773 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26777 , an Email address like this:
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26780 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26781 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26786 , or a link to a file.
26789 \begin_layout Standard
26790 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26803 to the link target.
26806 \begin_layout Standard
26807 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26808 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26809 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26810 the text style dialog.
26811 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26815 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26817 name "LyX's homepage"
26818 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26825 \begin_layout Standard
26826 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26830 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26833 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26837 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26839 \begin_inset Newline newline
26847 \begin_inset Newline newline
26854 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26857 \begin_layout Section
26859 \begin_inset Index idx
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26871 name "sec:Appendices"
26878 \begin_layout Standard
26879 Appendices are created with the menu
26881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26883 \begin_inset space ~
26887 \begin_inset space ~
26893 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26894 as the appendix part of the book.
26895 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26898 \begin_layout Standard
26899 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26900 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26901 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26902 and the subsection number.
26903 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26909 \begin_inset space ~
26913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26915 reference "chap:Credits"
26920 \begin_inset space ~
26924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26926 reference "subsec:Export"
26933 \begin_layout Section
26935 \begin_inset Index idx
26938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26947 name "sec:Bibliography"
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26957 You can include a bibliography database,
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 Known under the name
26963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26966 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26976 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26977 manually, using the paragraph environment
26981 , which was described in section
26982 \begin_inset space ~
26986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26988 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26993 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26994 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26998 use a bibliography database.
27001 \begin_layout Subsection
27002 The Bibliography Environment
27005 \begin_layout Standard
27010 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27012 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27021 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27023 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27033 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27037 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27042 or the toolbar button
27045 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27049 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27050 containing the available citations.
27051 Select one or more keys from the list and
27061 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27062 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27068 entry with surrounding brackets.
27073 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27074 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27086 \begin_layout Standard
27090 Companion Second Edition
27093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27095 key "latexcompanion"
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27103 The \SpecialChar LyX
27104 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27118 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27120 \begin_inset space ~
27128 arg "layout-paragraph"
27132 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27135 \begin_layout Subsection
27136 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27138 \begin_inset Index idx
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 Bibliography ! Databases
27148 \begin_inset Index idx
27151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27152 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27161 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27168 \begin_layout Standard
27169 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27175 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27177 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27178 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27183 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27185 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27186 your working field in a database.
27187 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27188 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27189 list for that document.
27190 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27194 \begin_layout Standard
27195 The database is a text file with the file extension
27196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27207 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27208 The format is explained in
27209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27215 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27217 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27219 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27224 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27225 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27226 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27228 \begin_inset Flex URL
27231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27233 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27242 To use a database, use the menu
27244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27249 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27251 \begin_inset space ~
27257 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27258 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27265 Add bibliography to TOC
27267 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27272 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27273 in the document or just the cited references.
27276 \begin_layout Standard
27277 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27289 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27290 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27291 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27292 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27294 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27300 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27301 \begin_inset Newline newline
27305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27307 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27319 \begin_layout Standard
27320 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27323 \begin_layout Standard
27324 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27325 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27327 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27340 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27341 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27342 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27346 The following variants are possible:
27349 \begin_layout Description
27350 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27351 with other bibliography packages (e.
27352 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27356 \begin_inset space \space{}
27363 ), only with the package
27367 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27371 \begin_layout Description
27372 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27373 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27374 with all bibliography packages, except
27379 \begin_layout Description
27380 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27385 , works with all bibliography packages
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27389 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27390 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27392 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27395 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 When you select the option
27411 Sectioned bibliography
27415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27419 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27420 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27422 Customizing Bibliographies
27426 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27431 Additional Features
27436 \begin_layout Standard
27437 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27438 the two methods of creating them.
27439 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27440 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27441 We used the style file
27445 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27448 \begin_layout Subsection
27450 \begin_inset Index idx
27453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 Bibliography ! Citation format
27462 \begin_layout Standard
27463 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27464 For this feature you need to enable the option
27470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27474 \begin_inset Index idx
27477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 Document ! Settings
27488 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27489 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27490 style files as explained in
27491 the previous section.
27494 \begin_layout Standard
27495 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27496 the citation reference window.
27497 Here is an example where the text
27498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27502 \begin_inset space ~
27506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27509 appears after the reference:
27512 \begin_layout Standard
27514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27517 key "latexcompanion"
27524 \begin_layout Section
27526 \begin_inset Index idx
27529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27545 \begin_layout Standard
27546 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27550 \begin_inset space ~
27555 or the toolbar button
27562 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27563 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27564 by \SpecialChar LyX
27565 as the index entry.
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27569 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27572 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27574 \begin_inset space ~
27580 A light blue box labeled
27581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27592 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27593 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27597 \begin_layout Standard
27598 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27599 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27600 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27601 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27605 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27612 \begin_layout Subsection
27613 Grouping Index Entries
27614 \begin_inset Index idx
27617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27626 \begin_layout Standard
27627 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27629 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27630 lists under the entry
27631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27639 First we create the entry
27640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27648 \begin_inset space ~
27652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27654 reference "subsec:Lists"
27659 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27660 \begin_inset space ~
27664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27666 reference "sec:Itemize"
27670 , we insert the command
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27679 \begin_layout Standard
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27689 \begin_layout Standard
27690 for the enumerated list in section
27691 \begin_inset space ~
27695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27697 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27704 \begin_layout Standard
27705 The exclamation mark
27706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27713 marks the grouping levels.
27714 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27715 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27716 If we don't have an index entry for
27717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27724 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27727 \begin_layout Subsection
27729 \begin_inset Index idx
27732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27733 Index ! Page ranges
27741 \begin_layout Standard
27742 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27744 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27745 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27746 an index entry in section
27747 \begin_inset space ~
27751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27753 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27763 Paragraph environments|(
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 and another entry at the end of section
27768 \begin_inset space ~
27772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27774 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27781 \begin_layout Standard
27784 Paragraph environments|)
27787 \begin_layout Standard
27789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27812 respectively start and end the index range.
27813 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27814 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27815 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27816 An example is the index entry
27817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27820 Document ! Settings
27821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27827 \begin_layout Subsection
27829 \begin_inset Index idx
27832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27833 Index ! Cross referencing
27841 \begin_layout Standard
27842 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27843 We referred for example in the index entry
27844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27858 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27862 ) to the index entry
27863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 in the same section using the entry
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27876 GIF|see{Image formats}
27879 \begin_layout Standard
27880 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27882 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27883 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27886 \begin_layout Subsection
27888 \begin_inset Index idx
27891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27892 Index ! Entry order
27900 \begin_layout Standard
27901 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27902 follow the rules for the index order.
27903 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27909 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27911 \begin_inset space ~
27915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27917 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27926 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27927 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27952 \begin_inset Index idx
27955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27956 Dummy entries ! maïs
27962 \begin_inset Index idx
27965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 Dummy entries ! maître
27972 \begin_inset Index idx
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27981 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27982 maïs, maison, maître.
27983 To achieve this, we use the command
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27989 previous entry@current entry
27992 \begin_layout Standard
27993 In our case we want to have
27994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28009 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28019 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28020 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28022 See the next subsection for an example.
28025 \begin_layout Standard
28026 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28033 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28038 to generate the index (see sec.
28039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28045 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28054 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28055 -package aeguill in sec.
28056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28062 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28066 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28067 -packages although all these index
28068 commands start with
28069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28082 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28087 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28114 \begin_layout Subsection
28116 \begin_inset Index idx
28119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28120 Index ! Entry layout
28128 \begin_layout Standard
28129 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28130 \begin_inset Index idx
28133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 This is an italic dummy entry
28141 You can also format the page number using the character
28142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28149 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28150 -command without a backslash.
28151 We can write for example
28154 \begin_layout Standard
28157 italic page number:|textit
28160 \begin_layout Standard
28161 to get the page number in italic.
28162 \begin_inset Index idx
28165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28166 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28171 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28172 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28190 \begin_inset space ~
28196 Have a look at section
28197 \begin_inset space ~
28201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28203 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28207 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28211 \begin_layout Standard
28212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28220 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28224 to generate the index, see sec.
28225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28231 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28240 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28245 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28249 key "latexcompanion"
28261 \begin_layout Standard
28262 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28264 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28265 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28266 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28267 If so, put the following in the preamble
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28286 \begin_layout Standard
28292 \begin_layout Standard
28293 in the index entry.
28294 \begin_inset Index idx
28297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28298 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28303 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28304 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28305 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28309 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28310 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28311 a bold font for all index entries.
28312 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28324 documentation for details,
28325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28327 key "makeindex,xindy"
28334 \begin_layout Subsection
28336 \begin_inset Index idx
28339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28348 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28355 \begin_layout Standard
28356 If the index generation program
28360 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28361 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28365 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28366 distribution, is used.
28370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28375 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28376 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28377 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28378 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28379 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28389 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28391 dialog, see section
28392 \begin_inset space ~
28396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28398 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28403 The available options are listed and explained in
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28406 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28411 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28416 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28417 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28421 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28425 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28426 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28429 \begin_layout Subsection
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28435 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28443 next to the standard index.
28445 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28446 that add this feature.
28453 \begin_inset Index idx
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 -packages ! splitidx
28463 package to generate multiple indexes.
28464 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28470 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28479 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28480 style, but it also includes
28481 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28482 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28492 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28498 and select the option
28500 Use multiple Indexes
28507 already contains the standard index
28508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28516 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28517 also appear as a heading) to the
28521 input field and press the
28526 The new index now also appears in the list.
28527 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28528 label color to the new index.
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28542 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28543 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28544 are additional features:
28547 \begin_layout Itemize
28548 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28549 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28552 \begin_layout Itemize
28553 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28554 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28562 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28563 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28564 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28565 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28568 \begin_layout Section
28569 Nomenclature/Glossary
28570 \begin_inset Index idx
28573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28580 \begin_inset Index idx
28583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28614 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28621 \begin_layout Standard
28622 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28623 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28624 called nomenclature or glossary.
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28635 \begin_inset Index idx
28638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28640 -packages ! nomencl
28646 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28654 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28660 and then use the menu
28662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28668 \begin_inset space ~
28673 or the toolbar button
28676 arg "nomencl-insert"
28681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28692 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28695 \begin_layout Standard
28696 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28697 The first is the term or
28701 that you wish to define.
28706 of the term or symbol.
28709 \begin_layout Standard
28710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28718 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28719 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28727 \begin_layout Subsection
28728 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28729 \begin_inset Index idx
28732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 Nomenclature ! Layout
28741 \begin_layout Standard
28742 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28746 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28753 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28761 \begin_inset Newline newline
28769 \begin_inset Newline newline
28775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28782 character starts/ends the formula.
28783 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28784 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28796 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28806 \begin_layout Standard
28807 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28808 -syntax is given in section
28809 \begin_inset space ~
28813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28822 \begin_layout Standard
28826 \begin_inset space ~
28831 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28833 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28838 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28845 in this document is:
28846 \begin_inset Newline newline
28851 dummy entry for the character
28856 \begin_inset Newline newline
28868 \begin_inset space ~
28878 font use the command
28907 \begin_layout Standard
28908 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28909 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28913 \begin_inset space \space{}
28917 \begin_inset Newline newline
28933 \begin_inset Newline newline
28936 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28937 This command will make the font of all symbols
28944 \begin_inset space ~
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 If the characters |
28954 \begin_inset space \space{}
28958 \begin_inset space \space{}
28962 \begin_inset space \space{}
28966 \begin_inset space \space{}
28970 \begin_inset space \space{}
28973 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28974 a quote character in front of them.
28975 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28976 LatexCommand nomenclature
28977 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28978 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28985 \begin_layout Subsection
28986 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28987 \begin_inset Index idx
28990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28991 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28999 \begin_layout Standard
29000 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29001 -code of the symbol
29003 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29005 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29008 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29009 LatexCommand nomenclature
29011 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29018 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29022 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29023 LatexCommand nomenclature
29026 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29031 They will be sorted by
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29058 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29061 will be sorted before the
29065 since the character
29066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29073 is considered in sorting.
29076 \begin_layout Standard
29077 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29085 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29086 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29088 For the example given, you can insert
29092 in this field for the
29093 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29100 will be located before
29101 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29107 \begin_layout Standard
29108 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29113 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29122 \begin_layout Subsection
29123 Nomenclature Options
29124 \begin_inset Index idx
29127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29128 Nomenclature ! Options
29136 \begin_layout Standard
29141 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29142 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29145 \begin_layout Description
29146 refeq Appends the phrase
29147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29162 to every nomenclature entry, where
29168 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29171 \begin_layout Description
29172 refpage Appends the phrase
29173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29188 to every nomenclature entry, where
29194 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29197 \begin_layout Description
29198 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29201 \begin_layout Standard
29202 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29203 class options list in the
29205 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29209 In this document the options
29216 \begin_layout Standard
29217 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29223 \begin_layout Standard
29224 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29225 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29230 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29233 \begin_layout Description
29243 \begin_layout Description
29246 nomrefpage Like the
29253 \begin_layout Description
29256 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29265 \begin_layout Description
29269 \begin_inset space ~
29275 \begin_inset space ~
29280 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29292 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29293 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29297 \begin_layout Standard
29305 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29308 \begin_inset Newline newline
29315 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29320 \begin_inset Newline newline
29324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29339 by their translation.
29342 \begin_layout Subsection
29343 Printing the Nomenclature
29344 \begin_inset Index idx
29347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29348 Nomenclature ! Printing
29356 \begin_layout Standard
29357 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29360 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29376 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29377 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29378 You can choose between these settings:
29381 \begin_layout Description
29382 Default a space of 1
29383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29389 \begin_layout Description
29391 \begin_inset space ~
29395 \begin_inset space ~
29398 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29401 \begin_layout Description
29402 Custom custom space
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29406 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29415 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29423 For example, in order to change the name to
29427 , add the following line to the preamble:
29430 \begin_layout Standard
29438 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29441 \begin_layout Subsection
29442 Nomenclature Program
29443 \begin_inset Index idx
29446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29447 Nomenclature ! Program
29453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29455 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29462 \begin_layout Standard
29468 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29469 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29471 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29476 by adding options, see section
29477 \begin_inset space ~
29481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29483 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29488 The available options are listed and explained in
29489 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29491 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29498 \begin_layout Section
29500 \begin_inset Index idx
29503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29510 \begin_inset Index idx
29513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29514 Document ! Branches
29520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29522 name "sec:Branches"
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29531 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29532 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29533 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29536 \begin_layout Standard
29537 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29538 allows you to put text into branches.
29539 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29540 To create a branch, either select the menu
29542 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29546 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29555 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29556 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29557 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29558 and whether the name of the branch should
29559 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29560 (see below for an example).
29561 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29562 to the name of the other) and to add
29563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29578 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29579 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29582 \begin_layout Standard
29583 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29584 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29589 where you can choose a branch.
29590 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29594 \begin_layout Standard
29595 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29596 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 \begin_inset Branch Question
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29604 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29616 \begin_layout Standard
29617 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29625 \begin_layout Standard
29632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29633 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29636 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29637 Consider for example a file
29638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29645 which has the above branches.
29647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29654 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29678 branch were inactive,
29679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29694 branch was active, likewise
29695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29710 branch was active, and
29711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29718 if both branches were active.
29719 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29723 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29731 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29732 definitions for each branch.
29733 For example you can define for the question branch
29737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29738 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29739 -syntax, see section
29740 \begin_inset space ~
29744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29746 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29758 \begin_layout Standard
29768 \begin_layout Standard
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29779 and for the answer branch
29782 \begin_layout Standard
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29803 \begin_inset Branch Question
29806 \begin_layout Standard
29810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29839 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29842 \begin_layout Standard
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_layout Standard
29875 Now it is possible to use the
29879 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29886 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29889 commands to obtain conditional output.
29890 Here is an example formula where only the
29897 \begin_inset Formula
29899 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29908 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29916 \begin_layout Standard
29917 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29923 \begin_inset space \space{}
29926 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29928 For this advanced usage, see the
29933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29936 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29943 \begin_layout Section
29945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29947 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29952 \begin_inset Index idx
29955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29964 \begin_layout Standard
29967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29968 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29971 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29973 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29979 \begin_inset Index idx
29982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29984 -packages ! hyperref
29989 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29990 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29991 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29992 part of the document.
29996 \begin_layout Standard
29997 The header information in the dialog tab
30001 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30002 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30003 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30004 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30012 \begin_inset space ~
30017 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30018 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30019 and author entries.
30023 \begin_inset space ~
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30036 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30039 \begin_layout Standard
30040 You can specify in the dialog tab
30044 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30049 \begin_inset space ~
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30062 option allows long links to be split;
30065 \begin_inset space ~
30069 \begin_inset space ~
30073 \begin_inset space ~
30081 \begin_inset space ~
30086 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30089 \begin_inset space ~
30094 colors the different links.
30095 The default colors are:
30098 \begin_layout Labeling
30099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30104 for hyperlinks and URLs
30107 \begin_layout Labeling
30108 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30116 \begin_layout Labeling
30117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 but you can change these in the field
30131 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30134 \begin_layout Standard
30137 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30145 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30146 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30147 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30150 \begin_layout Standard
30155 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30156 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30157 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30167 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30168 when opening the PDF.
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30173 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30174 \begin_inset space ~
30177 1 will only display the sections.
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30181 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30182 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30188 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30198 \begin_layout Section
30200 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30204 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30211 \begin_layout Subsection
30214 \begin_inset Index idx
30217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30227 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30234 \begin_layout Standard
30235 As \SpecialChar LyX
30236 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30237 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30238 commands and constructs,
30241 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30242 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30243 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30244 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30245 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30246 cannot support all packages and
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30251 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30252 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30253 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30257 Code box is created by the menu
30259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30261 \begin_inset space ~
30266 or by the toolbar button
30279 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30290 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30292 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30293 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30300 , you can write the command part
30306 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30307 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30311 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30312 Code box behind the word.
30313 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30314 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30318 \begin_layout Standard
30319 \begin_inset Graphics
30320 filename clipart/ERT.png
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30332 \begin_layout Standard
30333 This is a line with a
30337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30360 \begin_layout Standard
30361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30370 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30371 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30372 know that the command is finished.
30380 \begin_layout Subsection
30381 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30383 \begin_inset Argument 1
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30387 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 \begin_inset Index idx
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30407 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30414 \begin_layout Standard
30415 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30416 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30417 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30418 uses in the background.
30419 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30420 is based on commands, you can
30421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30429 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30430 any time if you know the right commands.
30431 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30432 is the end of the day.
30433 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30434 all caption labels bold.
30435 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30437 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30441 \begin_layout Standard
30442 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30444 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30446 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30458 \begin_layout Standard
30459 As result you find that the package
30464 \begin_inset Index idx
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30469 -packages ! caption
30475 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30477 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30480 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30484 \begin_inset space ~
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30497 usepackage[options]{package name}
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30501 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30502 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30503 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30504 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30507 \begin_layout Standard
30508 In your case the package name is
30513 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30518 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30519 So you add the command
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30527 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30530 \begin_layout Standard
30531 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30536 For more commands provided by the
30540 package, have a look at its documentation,
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30556 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30558 For example if you use a
30562 class, you don't need the package
30566 , you can instead write
30569 \begin_layout Standard
30574 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30579 \begin_layout Standard
30580 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30581 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30582 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30589 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30592 \begin_layout Standard
30593 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30594 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30596 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30597 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30598 Code box as described in the previous
30602 \begin_layout Standard
30603 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30604 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30609 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30616 \begin_layout Standard
30617 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30623 \begin_layout Standard
30627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30637 \begin_inset Note Note
30640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30649 \begin_layout Left Header
30650 \begin_inset Argument 1
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 \begin_inset Note Note
30676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30677 defines the header line as described below
30685 \begin_layout Center Header
30686 \begin_inset Argument 1
30689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30698 \begin_layout Right Header
30699 \begin_inset Argument 1
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 \begin_layout Left Footer
30724 \begin_inset Argument 1
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30748 \begin_layout Center Footer
30749 \begin_inset Argument 1
30752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30764 \begin_inset Newline newline
30768 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30774 \begin_layout Right Footer
30775 \begin_inset Argument 1
30778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 \begin_layout Section
30801 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30804 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30809 \begin_inset Index idx
30812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30813 Document ! Header/Footer line
30819 \begin_inset Index idx
30822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 \begin_layout Standard
30832 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30853 \begin_inset space ~
30859 As a second step add in the menu
30861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30869 Custom Header/Footerlines
30870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30874 This module offers the following 6
30875 \begin_inset space ~
30881 \begin_layout Description
30883 \begin_inset space ~
30887 \begin_inset space ~
30891 \begin_inset space ~
30895 \begin_inset space ~
30899 \begin_inset space ~
30905 \begin_layout Description
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30911 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_inset space ~
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30923 \begin_inset space ~
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30933 \begin_layout Standard
30934 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30935 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30937 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30943 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30947 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30951 \begin_inset Float figure
30957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30960 \begin_inset Tabular
30961 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30962 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30963 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30965 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31029 The normal text on the page goes here.
31030 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31032 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31033 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31038 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31047 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31058 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31076 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31087 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31105 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31123 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31128 name "fig:Page-layout"
31132 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31154 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31158 \begin_inset space ~
31163 is set to “Default”.
31164 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31173 \begin_layout Subsection
31177 \begin_layout Standard
31178 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31179 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31180 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31181 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31183 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31184 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31187 \begin_layout Standard
31188 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31189 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31195 \begin_inset space ~
31203 \begin_layout Description
31206 thepage prints the current page number
31209 \begin_layout Description
31212 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31215 \begin_layout Description
31218 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31221 \begin_layout Description
31224 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31225 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31232 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31235 because it usually goes in a left header.
31238 \begin_layout Description
31241 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31242 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31244 It is normally used in the right header.
31247 \begin_layout Subsection
31248 Default header/footer
31251 \begin_layout Standard
31252 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31253 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31254 footer has the page number.
31255 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31256 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31257 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31260 \begin_inset space ~
31268 \begin_layout Subsection
31272 \begin_layout Standard
31273 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31274 Some pages are different.
31275 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31276 a new part or chapter in your book.
31277 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31278 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31279 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31283 Header and footer decoration line
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 By default, you get a 0.4
31288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31291 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31292 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31304 in the following way:
31307 \begin_layout Standard
31314 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31327 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31334 \begin_layout Standard
31335 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31337 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31338 \begin_inset space ~
31342 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31352 Several header/footer lines
31355 \begin_layout Standard
31356 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31357 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31358 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31360 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31386 \begin_layout Standard
31393 headheight}{height}
31396 \begin_layout Standard
31397 where height is a size in standard units.
31398 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31399 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31400 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31401 logfile with the menu
31403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31409 \begin_inset space ~
31414 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31419 \begin_inset Index idx
31422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31424 -packages ! fancyhdr
31430 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31431 for your header/footer.
31434 \begin_layout Subsection
31438 \begin_layout Standard
31439 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31440 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31441 This example consists of the following definition:
31444 \begin_layout Description
31446 \begin_inset space ~
31455 , empty optional argument
31458 \begin_layout Description
31460 \begin_inset space ~
31463 Header empty, empty optional argument
31466 \begin_layout Description
31468 \begin_inset space ~
31477 in the optional argument
31480 \begin_layout Description
31482 \begin_inset space ~
31491 in the optional argument
31494 \begin_layout Description
31496 \begin_inset space ~
31509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31513 \begin_inset Newline newline
31517 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31524 in the optional argument
31527 \begin_layout Description
31529 \begin_inset space ~
31538 , empty optional argument
31541 \begin_layout Description
31544 headrulewidth set to 2
31545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31551 \begin_layout Standard
31552 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31553 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31568 \begin_layout Standard
31569 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31575 \begin_layout Standard
31579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 pagestyle{headings}
31589 \begin_inset Note Note
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 switches back to page style with the default headings
31601 \begin_layout Section
31602 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31605 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31610 \begin_inset Index idx
31613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31620 \begin_inset Index idx
31623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31632 \begin_layout Standard
31634 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31635 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31636 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31639 \begin_layout Subsection
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31644 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31650 \begin_inset Index idx
31653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 -packages ! preview-latex
31660 (on some systems named simply
31665 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31673 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31675 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31683 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31684 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31685 -package are automatically
31686 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31690 \begin_layout Subsection
31694 \begin_layout Standard
31695 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31696 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31698 activate the option
31701 \begin_inset space ~
31708 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31714 \begin_inset space ~
31718 \begin_inset space ~
31721 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31728 \begin_inset space ~
31741 \begin_inset space ~
31746 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31750 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31755 \begin_inset space ~
31763 \begin_inset space ~
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31772 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31773 and when you finish
31777 \begin_layout Standard
31778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31786 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31787 generated by activating the option
31790 \begin_inset space ~
31796 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31804 \begin_layout Subsection
31805 Selected document parts
31808 \begin_layout Standard
31809 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31810 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31811 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31812 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31814 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31820 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31821 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31822 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31826 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31833 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31845 is explained in section
31847 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31852 \begin_inset space ~
31862 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31863 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31864 the final rotated boxes,
31865 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31866 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31868 Here is the result:
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 \begin_inset Preview
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31883 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31889 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31899 height_special "totalheight"
31904 backgroundcolor "none"
31907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31932 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31938 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31961 Previewing works also for colors.
31962 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31981 is explained in section
31988 \begin_inset space ~
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 \begin_inset Preview
32004 \begin_layout Standard
32008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32027 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32032 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32051 \begin_layout Standard
32052 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32059 If \SpecialChar LyX
32060 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32061 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32062 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32063 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32064 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32065 the \SpecialChar TeX
32067 If \SpecialChar LyX
32068 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32069 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32071 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32072 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32073 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32076 \begin_layout Subsection
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32083 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32086 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32088 \begin_inset space ~
32093 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32095 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32097 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32098 's main window, then only this selection
32099 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32100 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32101 the source view window.
32106 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32107 ; but note that if you have
32108 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32110 not just the one which is open at the time.
32113 \begin_layout Section
32114 Advanced Find and Replace
32115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32117 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32122 \begin_inset Index idx
32125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32132 \begin_inset Index idx
32135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32144 \begin_layout Subsection
32148 \begin_layout Standard
32149 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32150 allows for searching of complex,
32151 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32153 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32154 The key-features are:
32157 \begin_layout Itemize
32158 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32159 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32160 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32164 \begin_layout Itemize
32165 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32166 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32167 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32168 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32171 \begin_layout Itemize
32172 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32173 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32174 outside of mathematics environments
32177 \begin_layout Itemize
32178 Search may be widened to a specific
32183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32187 \begin_inset space ~
32190 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32191 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32198 \begin_layout Itemize
32199 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32200 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32205 \begin_inset space ~
32208 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32211 \begin_layout Subsection
32215 \begin_layout Standard
32216 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32231 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32234 ) or the toolbar button
32237 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32243 Advanced Find and Replace
32248 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32258 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32262 \begin_inset space ~
32267 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32270 arg "paragraph-break"
32274 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32275 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32279 arg "paragraph-break"
32282 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32286 searches backwards.
32289 \begin_layout Standard
32293 \begin_inset space ~
32298 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32307 \begin_inset space ~
32312 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32316 Searching for mathematics
32319 \begin_layout Standard
32320 Mathematical formulas, such as
32321 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32324 or something more complex like
32325 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32328 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32333 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32334 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32335 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32336 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32346 \begin_layout Standard
32347 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32348 This is done by switching to the
32352 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32357 This way, entering in the
32364 \begin_layout Itemize
32365 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32366 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32369 \begin_layout Itemize
32370 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32371 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32374 \begin_layout Itemize
32375 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32376 of it only within section headings.
32377 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32378 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32382 \begin_layout Itemize
32383 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32384 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32391 \begin_layout Standard
32392 The entries made in the
32396 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32405 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32409 button or alternatively press
32412 arg "paragraph-break"
32419 while the cursor is in the
32422 \begin_inset space ~
32430 \begin_layout Standard
32431 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32433 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32437 \begin_layout Itemize
32438 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32439 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32447 with its typewriter version
32448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32462 \begin_layout Itemize
32463 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32469 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32481 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32488 (you may want to enable the
32491 \begin_inset space ~
32499 \begin_inset space ~
32504 options and disable the
32512 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32520 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32521 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32525 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32528 , or occurrences of
32529 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32533 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32539 \begin_layout Subsection
32543 \begin_layout Standard
32544 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32549 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32553 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32562 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32568 This is done with the context menu
32570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32571 Insert Regular Expression
32573 while the cursor is in the
32578 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32579 expression matching rules
32583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32584 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32591 \begin_inset space ~
32594 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32595 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32601 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32602 same text in the document.
32603 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32604 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32607 \begin_layout Enumerate
32608 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32613 editor the fraction
32614 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32618 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32621 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32622 fractions with the given denominator.
32625 \begin_layout Enumerate
32626 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32638 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32643 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32644 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32645 Also, by inserting a
32646 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32649 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32650 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32653 \begin_layout Standard
32654 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32655 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32656 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32659 , and referring back to them through
32660 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32664 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32668 For example, try searching with the regexp
32669 \begin_inset Newline newline
32672 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32675 \begin_inset Newline newline
32678 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32681 \begin_layout Standard
32682 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32685 \begin_layout Standard
32686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32694 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32695 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32696 sub-expressions is absolute.
32698 \begin_inset space ~
32702 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32705 always refers to the first occurrence of
32706 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32709 in all entered regexps.
32717 \begin_layout Section
32719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32721 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32726 \begin_inset Index idx
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32738 \begin_layout Standard
32740 has a built-in spell checker.
32743 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32750 key or the toolbar button
32753 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32756 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32757 beginning of the currently selected text.
32758 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32759 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32760 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32761 scrolled so that it is visible.
32762 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32763 n, if any could be found.
32764 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32768 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32769 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32772 \begin_layout Standard
32773 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32780 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32781 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32783 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32784 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32787 \begin_inset space ~
32795 arg "dialog-show character"
32798 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32800 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32803 \begin_layout Standard
32804 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32805 can be downloaded from here:
32806 \begin_inset Newline newline
32810 \begin_inset Flex URL
32813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32821 \begin_inset Newline newline
32825 \begin_inset space ~
32828 files for each language.
32829 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32833 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32834 's installation subfolder
32842 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32844 \begin_inset Newline newline
32847 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32848 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32849 but in most cases these are
32865 is the language code.
32868 \begin_layout Subsection
32872 \begin_layout Standard
32875 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32876 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32878 \begin_inset space ~
32881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32884 you can set the following things:
32887 \begin_layout Description
32889 \begin_inset space ~
32892 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32893 should use for spell checking.
32894 Depending on your platform,
32908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32909 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32910 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32925 \begin_inset space ~
32928 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32931 \begin_layout Description
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32936 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32937 will always use the given language
32938 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32941 \begin_layout Description
32943 \begin_inset space ~
32946 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32952 \begin_inset space \space{}
32956 This should normally not be needed.
32959 \begin_layout Description
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32968 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32980 \begin_layout Description
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32985 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32986 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32987 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32988 appear in a context menu.
32989 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32993 \begin_layout Description
32995 \begin_inset space ~
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33003 \begin_inset space ~
33006 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33010 \begin_layout Section
33012 \begin_inset Index idx
33015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33024 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33031 \begin_layout Standard
33033 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33034 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33046 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33055 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33057 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33058 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33059 which are available for many languages.
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33063 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33064 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33068 \begin_layout Subsection
33069 Setting up the thesaurus
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33081 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33085 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33090 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33096 \begin_inset space ~
33104 For instance, the US English files are named:
33107 \begin_layout Itemize
33111 \begin_layout Itemize
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33124 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33125 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33128 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33129 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33130 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33132 \begin_inset space ~
33137 ) to the path where they are installed.
33141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33143 ies, typical locations are
33149 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33153 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33157 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33160 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33166 LibreOffice-<Version>
33173 On the Mac, the default location is
33175 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33176 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33177 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33178 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33179 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33180 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33188 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33189 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33190 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33194 \begin_layout Standard
33195 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33196 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33200 \begin_layout Itemize
33201 \begin_inset Flex URL
33204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33214 \begin_layout Standard
33215 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33216 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33218 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33219 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33220 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33227 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33229 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33230 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33237 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33240 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33246 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33249 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33250 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33258 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33259 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33260 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33262 \begin_inset space ~
33267 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33270 \begin_layout Subsection
33271 Using the thesaurus
33274 \begin_layout Standard
33275 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33277 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33280 or the toolbar button
33283 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33286 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33288 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33290 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33291 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33292 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33301 ), related terms (such as
33304 \begin_inset space ~
33313 ), compounds (such as
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33325 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33334 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33337 \begin_layout Standard
33338 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33339 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33343 \begin_layout Standard
33344 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33345 the dictionary, such as the above
33349 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33354 \begin_inset space \space{}
33357 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33358 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33359 For example, looking up the word form
33363 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33368 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33373 \begin_inset space \space{}
33384 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33385 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33386 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33389 \begin_layout Section
33391 \begin_inset Index idx
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33401 \begin_inset Index idx
33404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33405 Document ! Change Tracking
33411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33413 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33420 \begin_layout Standard
33421 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33422 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33423 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33424 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33428 \begin_inset space ~
33431 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33433 \begin_inset space ~
33441 \begin_layout Standard
33442 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33456 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33457 You can change the color in
33459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33466 \begin_inset space ~
33471 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33477 \begin_inset Index idx
33480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33481 Color ! Change tracking
33486 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33487 's status bar when the
33488 cursor is in changed text.
33489 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33492 arg "changes-merge"
33498 \begin_layout Standard
33499 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33501 \begin_inset Index idx
33504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33514 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33520 \begin_layout Standard
33521 \begin_inset Graphics
33522 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33530 \begin_layout Standard
33531 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33548 \begin_layout Standard
33549 \begin_inset Tabular
33550 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33551 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33552 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33553 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 arg "changes-track"
33571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33582 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 arg "changes-output"
33610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33618 \begin_inset space ~
33621 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33627 \begin_inset space ~
33631 \begin_inset space ~
33640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33661 Jumps to the next change
33667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 arg "change-accept"
33684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33695 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33697 \begin_inset space ~
33706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 arg "change-reject"
33723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33731 \begin_inset space ~
33734 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33736 \begin_inset space ~
33745 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33754 arg "changes-merge"
33762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33770 \begin_inset space ~
33773 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33775 \begin_inset space ~
33784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33793 arg "all-changes-accept"
33801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33809 \begin_inset space ~
33812 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33814 \begin_inset space ~
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 arg "all-changes-reject"
33844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33852 \begin_inset space ~
33855 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33861 \begin_inset space ~
33870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33894 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33896 \begin_inset space ~
33905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33928 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33946 \begin_layout Standard
33947 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33953 \begin_layout Standard
33954 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33976 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33977 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33978 the next change after the current cursor position.
33979 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33980 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33981 step to the next change.
33982 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33985 \begin_layout Standard
33986 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33987 to describe a change.
33990 \begin_layout Standard
33991 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33997 \begin_inset Index idx
34000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 -packages ! dvipost
34008 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34016 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34020 \begin_layout Section
34021 Comparison of Documents
34022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34024 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34029 \begin_inset Index idx
34032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34033 Comparison of documents
34041 \begin_layout Standard
34042 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34045 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34049 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34050 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34052 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34054 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34075 \begin_inset space ~
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34100 enables the change tracking option
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34111 \begin_inset space ~
34116 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34119 \begin_layout Section
34120 International Support
34121 \begin_inset Index idx
34124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 International support
34133 \begin_layout Standard
34134 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34135 with any language you want.
34136 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34137 up \SpecialChar LyX
34139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34141 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34149 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34150 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34151 \begin_inset space ~
34155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34157 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34164 \begin_layout Subsection
34166 \begin_inset Index idx
34169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34176 \begin_inset Index idx
34179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34180 Document ! Settings
34186 \begin_inset Index idx
34189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 Document ! Language
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34202 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34205 dialog lets you set
34207 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34212 \begin_layout Standard
34217 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34222 \begin_inset space ~
34227 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34228 For details about the different encoding options see section
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34235 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34242 \begin_layout Subsection
34243 Keyboard mapping configuration
34244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34246 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34254 If you have for example a U.
34255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34258 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34259 can use an alternate keymap.
34260 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34267 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34270 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34271 \begin_inset space ~
34275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34277 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34282 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34283 which one you want to use.
34286 \begin_layout Standard
34287 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34288 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34289 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34293 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34294 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34295 one to support the characters you want.
34296 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34303 \begin_layout Chapter
34306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34308 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34315 \begin_layout Standard
34316 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34317 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34318 topic inside the user's guide.
34321 \begin_layout Section
34323 \begin_inset Index idx
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34340 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34343 \begin_layout Subsection
34347 \begin_layout Standard
34348 Creates a new document.
34351 \begin_layout Subsection
34355 \begin_layout Standard
34356 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34357 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34358 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34361 \begin_layout Subsection
34365 \begin_layout Standard
34369 \begin_layout Subsection
34373 \begin_layout Standard
34374 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34375 Click there on a file to open it.
34378 \begin_layout Subsection
34382 \begin_layout Standard
34383 Closes the current document.
34386 \begin_layout Subsection
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 Closes all opened documents.
34394 \begin_layout Subsection
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34399 Saves the actual document.
34402 \begin_layout Subsection
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34407 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34410 \begin_layout Subsection
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 Saves all opened documents.
34418 \begin_layout Subsection
34422 \begin_layout Standard
34423 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34426 \begin_layout Subsection
34430 \begin_layout Standard
34431 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34432 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34433 It is described in the section
34435 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34440 Additional Features
34445 \begin_layout Subsection
34449 \begin_layout Standard
34450 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34451 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34453 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34454 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34458 \begin_layout Standard
34459 When using the menu entry
34462 \begin_inset space ~
34467 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34471 \begin_inset space ~
34475 \begin_inset space ~
34479 \begin_inset space ~
34484 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34485 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34488 \begin_layout Subsection
34490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34492 name "subsec:Export"
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 You can export your document to various file formats.
34501 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34503 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34504 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34505 during its configuration.
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34517 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34524 \begin_layout Description
34530 \begin_inset space ~
34533 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34535 \begin_inset space ~
34538 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34539 \begin_inset Newline newline
34542 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34543 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34547 \begin_layout Description
34548 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34554 \begin_layout Description
34556 \begin_inset space ~
34559 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34565 \begin_layout Description
34566 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34567 's native DVI-format.
34568 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34569 files paths or file names in your document.
34571 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34578 \begin_layout Description
34579 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34580 in files paths or file names
34583 \begin_layout Description
34585 \begin_inset space ~
34592 ) DVI-format using the program
34594 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34597 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34601 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34609 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34617 \begin_layout Description
34619 \begin_inset space ~
34622 (cropped) the same as
34626 but with cropped page margins.
34629 \begin_layout Description
34631 \begin_inset space ~
34634 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34638 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34643 \begin_layout Description
34647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34655 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34663 \begin_layout Description
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34669 \begin_inset space ~
34672 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34676 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34684 \begin_layout Description
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34697 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34698 source that is compilable with the program
34700 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34704 \begin_layout Description
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34713 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34714 source, additionally all images used in the document
34715 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34719 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34722 \begin_layout Description
34726 \begin_inset space ~
34731 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34732 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34733 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34741 \begin_layout Description
34745 \begin_inset space ~
34754 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34755 source that is compilable with the program
34761 \begin_layout Description
34763 \begin_inset space ~
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34774 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34775 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34781 \begin_layout Description
34783 \begin_inset space ~
34786 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34787 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34793 \begin_inset space \space{}
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34817 represent the version number)
34820 \begin_layout Description
34822 \begin_inset space ~
34826 \begin_inset space ~
34829 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34830 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34831 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34835 \begin_layout Description
34836 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34837 's internal XHTML engine
34840 \begin_layout Description
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34850 \begin_inset space ~
34854 \begin_inset space ~
34857 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34862 For the conversion the program
34871 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34874 \begin_layout Description
34875 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34880 \begin_layout Description
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34885 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
34887 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34890 For the conversion the program
34899 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34902 \begin_layout Description
34904 \begin_inset space ~
34907 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
34908 For the conversion the program
34917 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34920 \begin_layout Description
34922 \begin_inset space ~
34925 (cropped) the same as
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34933 but with cropped page margins
34936 \begin_layout Description
34940 \begin_inset space ~
34945 PDF-format using the program
34949 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34952 \begin_layout Description
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34968 \begin_inset space ~
34973 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34978 \begin_inset space \space{}
34981 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34985 \begin_layout Description
34989 \begin_inset space ~
34994 PDF-format using the program
34996 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34999 , produces PDF-files directly
35002 \begin_layout Description
35006 \begin_inset space ~
35011 PDF-format using the program
35015 , produces PDF-files directly
35018 \begin_layout Description
35022 \begin_inset space ~
35027 PDF-format using the program
35031 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35034 \begin_layout Description
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35043 PDF-format using the program
35048 , produces PDF-files directly
35051 \begin_layout Description
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35063 \begin_layout Description
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35076 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35077 and then exported as text using the program
35082 \begin_layout Description
35087 PostScript format using the program
35092 \begin_layout Description
35093 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35094 source and also code in the statistical programming
35108 it is possible to use
35112 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35116 \begin_layout Standard
35117 If one of the menu entries
35124 \begin_inset space ~
35133 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35135 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35137 \begin_inset space ~
35141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35143 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35148 \begin_inset Index idx
35151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35152 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35161 \begin_layout Subsection
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35166 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35167 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35176 reference "sec:Paths"
35181 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35190 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35191 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35192 's preferences as described in section
35193 \begin_inset space ~
35197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35199 reference "subsec:Converters"
35206 \begin_layout Subsection
35207 New and Close Window
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35215 \begin_layout Subsection
35219 \begin_layout Standard
35220 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35223 \begin_layout Section
35225 \begin_inset Index idx
35228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35237 \begin_layout Subsection
35241 \begin_layout Standard
35242 Described in section
35243 \begin_inset space ~
35247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35249 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35256 \begin_layout Subsection
35257 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35260 \begin_layout Standard
35261 Described in section
35262 \begin_inset space ~
35266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35268 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35275 \begin_layout Subsection
35279 \begin_layout Standard
35280 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35281 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35284 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 \begin_layout Standard
35289 Selects the whole document.
35292 \begin_layout Subsection
35293 Find & Replace (Quick)
35296 \begin_layout Standard
35297 Described in section
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35304 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35311 \begin_layout Subsection
35312 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35315 \begin_layout Standard
35316 Described in section
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35323 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35330 \begin_layout Subsection
35331 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35339 \begin_layout Subsection
35343 \begin_layout Standard
35344 Described in section
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35351 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35358 \begin_layout Subsection
35360 \begin_inset Index idx
35363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35364 Paragraph ! Settings
35372 \begin_layout Standard
35373 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35374 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35380 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35397 \begin_layout Subsection
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35403 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35404 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35411 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35412 The properties of tables are described in section
35413 \begin_inset space ~
35417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35419 reference "sec:Tables"
35423 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35430 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35437 \begin_layout Subsection
35438 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35442 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35444 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35445 \begin_inset space ~
35449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35451 reference "sec:Nesting"
35456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35458 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35468 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35473 nts of the same type.
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35481 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35485 for an explanation.
35488 \begin_layout Section
35490 \begin_inset Index idx
35493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35502 \begin_layout Standard
35503 At the bottom of the
35507 menu the opened documents are listed.
35510 \begin_layout Subsection
35511 Open/Close all Insets
35514 \begin_layout Standard
35515 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35518 \begin_layout Subsection
35519 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35523 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 Math macros are described in the
35534 \begin_layout Subsection
35538 \begin_layout Standard
35539 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35540 \begin_inset space ~
35544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35546 reference "sec:Navigating"
35551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35553 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35560 \begin_layout Subsection
35564 \begin_layout Standard
35565 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35567 \begin_inset space ~
35571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35573 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35580 \begin_layout Subsection
35584 \begin_layout Standard
35585 Opens a window showing console messages.
35586 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35591 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35592 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35593 is processing the document.
35596 \begin_layout Subsection
35598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35600 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35605 \begin_inset Index idx
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35617 \begin_layout Standard
35618 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35619 All toolbars and the
35622 \begin_inset space ~
35627 can be turned on and off.
35632 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35656 \begin_inset space ~
35661 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35665 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35677 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35681 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35682 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35683 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35684 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35685 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35688 \begin_layout Standard
35690 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35691 \begin_inset space ~
35695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35697 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35704 \begin_layout Subsection
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35712 \begin_inset space ~
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35720 \begin_inset space ~
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35737 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35738 's main window vertically while
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35757 \begin_inset space ~
35761 \begin_inset space ~
35766 will split it horizontally.
35767 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35768 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35769 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35770 three or more documents at the same time.
35771 To close a split view, use the menu
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_inset space ~
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 Closes a split view.
35794 \begin_layout Subsection
35798 \begin_layout Standard
35799 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35800 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35801 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35802 's main window fullscreen.
35803 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35804 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35807 \begin_layout Section
35809 \begin_inset Index idx
35812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35821 \begin_layout Subsection
35825 \begin_layout Standard
35826 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35827 \begin_inset space ~
35831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35833 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35844 \begin_layout Subsection
35846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35848 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35856 Here you can insert the following characters:
35859 \begin_layout Description
35864 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35867 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35868 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35869 -packages you have installed.
35870 You can get a complete display by checking
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35879 \begin_inset Newline newline
35883 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35891 Not all characters will be visible in the
35895 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35903 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35907 ) can display every character.
35915 \begin_layout Description
35916 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35920 \begin_layout Description
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35929 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35930 \begin_inset space ~
35934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35936 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35943 \begin_layout Description
35945 \begin_inset space ~
35948 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35958 \begin_layout Description
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35963 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35967 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35973 \begin_layout Description
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35978 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35982 \begin_layout Description
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35987 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35991 \begin_layout Description
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35996 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36002 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36008 \begin_layout Description
36010 \begin_inset space ~
36013 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36017 \begin_layout Description
36019 \begin_inset space ~
36023 \begin_inset Index idx
36026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36033 \begin_inset Index idx
36036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36037 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36042 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36043 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36045 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36051 \begin_inset Index idx
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36062 \begin_inset Newline newline
36065 More information about this feature can be found in the
36071 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36077 \begin_layout Description
36078 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36080 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36081 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36085 \begin_layout Subsection
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36093 \begin_layout Description
36094 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36095 \begin_inset script superscript
36097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36106 \begin_layout Description
36107 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36108 \begin_inset script subscript
36110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36119 \begin_layout Description
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36124 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36131 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36138 \begin_layout Description
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36143 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36150 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36157 \begin_layout Description
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36162 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36163 \begin_inset space ~
36167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36169 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36176 \begin_layout Description
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36181 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36187 \begin_inset space \space{}
36190 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36191 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36200 To insert a fraction use the command
36205 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36209 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36218 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36225 \begin_layout Description
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36231 \begin_inset space ~
36235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36237 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36244 \begin_layout Description
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36249 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36250 \begin_inset space ~
36254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36256 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36263 \begin_layout Description
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36268 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36282 \begin_layout Description
36283 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36284 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36290 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36297 \begin_layout Description
36299 \begin_inset space ~
36302 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36309 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36316 \begin_layout Description
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36321 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36328 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36335 \begin_layout Description
36337 \begin_inset space ~
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36344 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36351 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36358 \begin_layout Description
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36363 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36364 as described in section
36365 \begin_inset space ~
36369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36371 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36378 \begin_layout Description
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36383 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36390 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36397 \begin_layout Description
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36402 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36403 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36411 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36418 \begin_layout Description
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36423 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36424 \begin_inset space ~
36428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36430 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36437 \begin_layout Description
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36446 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36453 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36460 \begin_layout Subsection
36464 \begin_layout Standard
36465 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36469 \begin_inset space ~
36490 are described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sec:toc"
36506 is described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "sec:Index"
36521 is described in section
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36528 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36534 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36537 is described in section
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36544 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36551 \begin_layout Subsection
36555 \begin_layout Standard
36556 To insert floats, as described in section
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36563 reference "sec:Floats"
36567 and in detail the chapter
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36582 \begin_layout Subsection
36586 \begin_layout Standard
36587 To insert notes, described in section
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36594 reference "sec:Notes"
36601 \begin_layout Subsection
36605 \begin_layout Standard
36606 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36608 Branches are described in section
36609 \begin_inset space ~
36613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36615 reference "sec:Branches"
36622 \begin_layout Subsection
36626 \begin_layout Standard
36627 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36628 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36630 An example is the document class
36631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36638 with three custom insets.
36641 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36645 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36651 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36654 \begin_layout Subsection
36656 \begin_inset Index idx
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36668 \begin_layout Standard
36669 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36671 For more information see chapter
36673 External Document Parts
36676 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36684 \begin_inset Index idx
36687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36698 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36705 \begin_inset space ~
36713 \begin_layout Subsection
36717 \begin_layout Standard
36722 dialog as described in section
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36729 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36736 \begin_layout Subsection
36740 \begin_layout Standard
36745 as described in section
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36752 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36759 \begin_layout Subsection
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36768 as described in section
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36782 \begin_layout Subsection
36784 \begin_inset Index idx
36787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36794 \begin_inset Index idx
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36798 Longtables ! Caption
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36808 Floats are described in section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "sec:Floats"
36819 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36834 \begin_layout Subsection
36838 \begin_layout Standard
36839 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36846 reference "sec:Index"
36853 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_layout Standard
36858 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36865 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36872 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36878 Tables are described in section
36879 \begin_inset space ~
36883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36885 reference "sec:Tables"
36889 and in detail in the chapter
36896 \begin_inset space ~
36904 \begin_layout Subsection
36908 \begin_layout Standard
36914 Graphics are described in section
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36921 reference "sec:Graphics"
36928 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 \begin_layout Standard
36933 Inserts a URL as described in section
36934 \begin_inset space ~
36938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36940 reference "subsec:URLs"
36947 \begin_layout Subsection
36951 \begin_layout Standard
36952 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36953 \begin_inset space ~
36957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36959 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36966 \begin_layout Subsection
36970 \begin_layout Standard
36971 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36972 \begin_inset space ~
36976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36978 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36985 \begin_layout Subsection
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36997 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37004 \begin_layout Subsection
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37009 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37010 title or caption of a float.
37011 Inserts a short title as described in section
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37018 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37025 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 \begin_layout Standard
37031 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37032 Code box as described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37048 \begin_inset Index idx
37051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37061 Inserts a program listings box.
37062 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37064 Program Code Listings
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37077 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37082 Inserts the actual date.
37083 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37087 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37103 \begin_layout Subsection
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37115 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37122 \begin_layout Section
37124 \begin_inset Index idx
37127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37141 of the current document.
37142 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37145 \begin_layout Subsection
37149 \begin_layout Standard
37150 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37151 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37152 to jump, for example, between section
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37157 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37161 2.5 and use the submenu
37164 \begin_inset space ~
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37191 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37195 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37201 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37204 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37207 \begin_layout Standard
37208 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37212 \begin_inset space ~
37217 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37225 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37228 \begin_layout Subsection
37229 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37232 \begin_layout Standard
37233 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37237 \begin_layout Subsection
37241 \begin_layout Standard
37242 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37243 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37244 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_layout Subsection
37264 \begin_layout Standard
37265 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37268 The \SpecialChar LyX
37269 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37271 \begin_inset space ~
37279 \begin_inset space ~
37284 manual for a detailed description.
37287 \begin_layout Section
37289 \begin_inset Index idx
37292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37301 \begin_layout Subsection
37305 \begin_layout Standard
37306 Change Tracking is described in section
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37313 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37320 \begin_layout Subsection
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37329 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37330 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37331 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37333 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37334 to the clipboard or update the view.
37335 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37339 \begin_layout Subsection
37340 Start Appendix Here
37343 \begin_layout Standard
37344 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37345 as described in section
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37352 reference "sec:Appendices"
37359 \begin_layout Subsection
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37369 default output format for the document (menu
37371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37372 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37373 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37385 \begin_inset space ~
37389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37391 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37395 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37398 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37399 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37404 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37409 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_inset space ~
37425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37427 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37431 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37432 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37435 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37437 \begin_inset space ~
37440 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37442 \begin_inset space ~
37445 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37449 \begin_inset space ~
37453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37455 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37460 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37461 when it is first configured.
37462 The default output format is
37465 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_layout Subsection
37474 View (Other Formats)
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37479 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37480 actual document with an external program.
37481 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37482 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37483 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37485 All possible formats are listed in section
37486 \begin_inset space ~
37490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37492 reference "subsec:Export"
37497 You should at least see the menu entry
37502 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37504 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37512 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37517 \begin_inset Index idx
37520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37521 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37530 \begin_layout Standard
37531 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37532 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37534 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37535 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37540 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37542 \begin_inset space ~
37545 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37555 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37560 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37561 when it is first configured.
37564 \begin_layout Subsection
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37574 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37577 \begin_layout Subsection
37578 Update (Other Formats)
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37583 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37586 \begin_layout Subsection
37587 View Master Document
37590 \begin_layout Standard
37591 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37612 manual for more information on this topic).
37613 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37614 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37627 generates the output of the whole book, while
37631 will just output the chapter alone.
37634 \begin_layout Standard
37635 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37636 in the document settings (menu
37638 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37639 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37652 \begin_inset space ~
37656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37658 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37662 ) or in the preferences (menu
37664 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37665 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37670 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37672 \begin_inset space ~
37675 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37693 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37700 \begin_layout Subsection
37701 Update Master Document
37704 \begin_layout Standard
37705 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37726 manual for more information on this topic).
37727 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37728 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37732 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37733 in the document settings (menu
37735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37736 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37737 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37749 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37755 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37759 ) or in the preferences (menu
37761 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37762 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37764 \begin_inset space ~
37767 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37772 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37778 \begin_inset space ~
37784 \begin_inset space ~
37788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37790 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37797 \begin_layout Subsection
37799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37801 name "subsec:Compressed"
37808 \begin_layout Standard
37809 Un/compresses the current document.
37810 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37811 compression (see the
37813 Additional Features
37815 manual for details).
37818 \begin_layout Subsection
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 The document settings are described in appendix
37824 \begin_inset space ~
37828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37830 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37837 \begin_layout Section
37839 \begin_inset Index idx
37842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 \begin_layout Subsection
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 Spell checking is explained in section
37857 \begin_inset space ~
37861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37863 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37870 \begin_layout Subsection
37874 \begin_layout Standard
37875 The thesaurus is described in section
37876 \begin_inset space ~
37880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37882 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37889 \begin_layout Subsection
37891 \begin_inset Index idx
37894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37901 \begin_inset Index idx
37904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 \begin_layout Standard
37914 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37915 the highlighted document part.
37918 \begin_layout Subsection
37924 \begin_inset Index idx
37927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37928 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37937 \begin_layout Standard
37938 Generates with the help of the program
37940 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37943 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37944 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37945 This feature is not available on Windows.
37948 \begin_layout Subsection
37954 \begin_inset Index idx
37957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37978 to see the full filename paths.
37981 \begin_layout Subsection
37983 \begin_inset Index idx
37986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37995 \begin_layout Standard
37996 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37997 files as described in section
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38004 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38011 \begin_layout Subsection
38013 \begin_inset Index idx
38016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38029 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38047 \begin_inset Index idx
38050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38051 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38060 \begin_layout Standard
38061 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38062 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38063 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38064 -packages and programs it needs; see
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38072 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38079 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_layout Standard
38088 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38089 \begin_inset space ~
38093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38095 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38102 \begin_layout Section
38104 \begin_inset Index idx
38107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38116 \begin_layout Standard
38117 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38118 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38120 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38133 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38134 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38135 packages and classes found
38136 by \SpecialChar LyX
38138 \begin_inset space ~
38142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38144 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38151 \begin_layout Standard
38155 \begin_inset space ~
38160 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38165 \begin_layout Section
38167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38169 name "sec:Toolbars"
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38178 \begin_inset space ~
38182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38184 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38192 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38193 This is described in the
38195 Additional Features
38200 \begin_layout Subsection
38202 \begin_inset Index idx
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 \begin_inset Graphics
38216 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38232 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38249 \begin_inset Note Note
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38258 manual for more information.
38266 \begin_layout Standard
38267 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38274 \begin_inset Tabular
38275 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38276 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38277 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38278 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38284 \begin_inset Graphics
38285 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38299 pull-down box for the environments
38312 \begin_layout Standard
38313 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38319 \begin_layout Standard
38321 \begin_inset Tabular
38322 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38323 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38324 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38325 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38349 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38379 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38409 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38439 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38455 arg "spelling-continuously"
38463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 Spellcheck continuously
38473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38526 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38632 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38686 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38714 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38729 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 Emphasize text, function of the
38759 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38761 \begin_inset space ~
38764 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38794 Set text to noun style, function of the
38796 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38801 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38819 arg "textstyle-apply"
38827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 Format text using the current settings in the
38833 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38838 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38871 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38891 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 arg "tabular-insert"
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38961 Toggle outline window on/off,
38963 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38991 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39006 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39031 \begin_layout Subsection
39033 \begin_inset Index idx
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39045 \begin_layout Standard
39046 \begin_inset Graphics
39047 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39055 \begin_layout Standard
39056 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39062 \begin_layout Standard
39063 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39067 \begin_layout Standard
39068 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39074 \begin_layout Standard
39075 \begin_inset Tabular
39076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39077 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39078 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 arg "layout Enumerate"
39124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 arg "layout Itemize"
39151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 arg "layout Description"
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39224 arg "depth-increment"
39232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39238 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39244 \begin_inset space ~
39253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39262 arg "depth-decrement"
39270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39276 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 arg "float-insert figure"
39308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39315 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39331 arg "float-insert table"
39339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39346 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39392 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39422 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39468 \begin_inset space ~
39477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39486 arg "nomencl-insert"
39494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39502 \begin_inset space ~
39511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39520 arg "footnote-insert"
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39566 \begin_inset space ~
39575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39599 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39601 \begin_inset space ~
39610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39619 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39695 \begin_inset space ~
39704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39713 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39728 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39759 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39779 arg "dialog-show character"
39787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39798 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 arg "layout-paragraph"
39822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39848 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39862 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39876 \begin_layout Subsection
39877 View/Update Toolbar
39878 \begin_inset Index idx
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39882 Toolbar ! View / Update
39890 \begin_layout Standard
39891 \begin_inset Graphics
39892 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39900 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39911 \begin_layout Standard
39912 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39918 \begin_layout Standard
39919 \begin_inset Tabular
39920 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39921 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39922 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39923 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39924 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39954 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39963 arg "buffer-update"
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39993 arg "master-buffer-view"
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 arg "master-buffer-update"
40035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40065 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40080 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40081 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40082 Synchronize with Output
40088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40112 View (Other Formats)
40118 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40125 arg "update-others"
40133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40140 Update (Other Formats)
40153 \begin_layout Standard
40154 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40158 \begin_layout Subsection
40162 \begin_layout Standard
40163 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40170 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40174 , the table toolbar
40175 \begin_inset Index idx
40178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40192 manual and the math macro toolbar
40193 \begin_inset Index idx
40196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40209 \begin_layout Chapter
40210 The Document Settings
40211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40213 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40218 \begin_inset Index idx
40221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 Document ! Settings
40230 \begin_layout Standard
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40239 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40240 is called with the menu
40242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40246 You can save your document settings as default with the
40248 Save as Document Defaults
40250 button in any dialog.
40251 This will create a template named
40255 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40256 when you create a new document without
40260 \begin_layout Standard
40265 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40266 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40269 \begin_layout Standard
40270 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40271 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40272 to find the one you are looking for.
40273 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40274 the submenus of the dialog.
40276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40280 \begin_inset space \space{}
40284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40291 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40292 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40293 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40296 \begin_layout Section
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40303 Document classes are described in section
40304 \begin_inset space ~
40308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40310 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40318 \begin_layout Standard
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40327 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40332 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40333 as a layout for a document class.
40334 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40336 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Some classes use special class options by default.
40347 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40351 and you can decide to use them or not.
40352 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40353 recommended you leave them untouched.
40358 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40359 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40364 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40366 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40372 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40373 \begin_inset Newline newline
40378 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40381 \begin_inset Newline newline
40384 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40385 distribution, see section
40390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40392 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40409 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40410 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40411 in the background if the child document
40412 is opened without its master.
40413 This way child documents are always compilable.
40414 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40421 \begin_inset space ~
40429 \begin_layout Standard
40430 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40441 \begin_inset Index idx
40444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40446 -packages ! prettyref
40452 \begin_inset Index idx
40455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40457 -packages ! refstyle
40462 for cross-references, see section
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40469 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40476 \begin_layout Section
40480 \begin_layout Standard
40481 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40482 Please refer to the section
40485 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40498 manual for details.
40501 \begin_layout Section
40505 \begin_layout Standard
40506 Modules are explained in section
40507 \begin_inset space ~
40511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40513 reference "subsec:Modules"
40520 \begin_layout Section
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40532 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40539 \begin_layout Section
40543 \begin_layout Standard
40544 The document font settings are described in section
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40551 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40558 \begin_layout Section
40562 \begin_layout Standard
40563 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40575 \begin_inset space ~
40580 and whether it should be a
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40588 can also be specified here.
40591 \begin_layout Standard
40592 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40593 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40594 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40596 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40599 \begin_layout Standard
40602 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40605 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40606 justifies the text on screen.
40607 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40611 \begin_layout Section
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40616 This dialog is described in sections
40617 \begin_inset space ~
40621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40623 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40630 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40637 \begin_layout Section
40641 \begin_layout Standard
40642 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40649 reference "subsec:Margins"
40656 \begin_layout Section
40658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40660 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40665 \begin_inset Index idx
40668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40669 Language ! Encoding
40677 \begin_layout Standard
40678 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40679 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40680 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40682 is always encoded in utf8).
40683 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40684 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40685 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40686 -command is not known for
40687 a particular character).
40690 \begin_layout Standard
40691 If you use the option
40696 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40697 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40698 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40700 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40701 exactly one encoding.
40702 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40705 \begin_layout Standard
40707 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40708 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40709 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40710 installation supports Unicode), choose
40711 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40712 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40713 is quite incomplete, so
40714 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40719 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40720 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40721 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40722 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40723 -commands is not used, because all
40724 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40725 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40726 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40727 , two new alternative engines
40728 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40730 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40732 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40768 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40772 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40775 \begin_layout Standard
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40784 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40785 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40795 The possible settings are:
40798 \begin_layout Description
40799 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40801 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40802 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40806 \begin_inset space ~
40810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40812 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40819 \begin_layout Description
40820 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40821 format you will use.
40822 In many cases this will be
40827 \begin_inset Index idx
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40838 If the newer package
40843 \begin_inset Index idx
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40848 -packages ! polyglossia
40853 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40854 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40855 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40857 this package will be used instead of
40864 \begin_layout Description
40866 \begin_inset space ~
40877 would be more appropriate.
40880 \begin_layout Description
40881 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40882 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40886 (for German texts), type in
40889 \begin_inset Newline newline
40894 usepackage{ngerman}
40897 \begin_layout Description
40898 None will not use a language package.
40899 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40902 \begin_layout Standard
40903 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40906 \begin_layout Description
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40923 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40929 \begin_inset Index idx
40932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 -packages ! inputenc
40940 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40941 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40942 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40946 \begin_layout Description
40947 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40949 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40950 commands, which may result in a big
40951 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40952 -commands are needed.
40955 \begin_layout Description
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40964 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40967 \begin_layout Description
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40976 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40979 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40984 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40987 \begin_layout Description
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40996 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40997 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41000 \begin_layout Description
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41009 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41013 \begin_layout Description
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_inset space ~
41022 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41023 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41026 \begin_layout Description
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41039 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41046 \begin_layout Description
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41059 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41060 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41063 \begin_layout Description
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41072 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41073 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41074 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41075 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_layout Description
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41095 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41096 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41097 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41099 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41110 \begin_layout Description
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41116 \begin_inset space ~
41119 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41122 \begin_layout Description
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41131 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41146 \begin_layout Description
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41151 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41154 \begin_layout Description
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41159 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41162 \begin_layout Description
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41168 \begin_inset space ~
41171 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41174 \begin_layout Description
41176 \begin_inset space ~
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_layout Description
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41192 \begin_inset space ~
41195 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41198 \begin_layout Description
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_layout Description
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41219 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41225 \begin_inset Index idx
41228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41235 , when using this, set the document language to
41240 \begin_layout Description
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41249 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41254 , when using this, set the document language to
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_layout Description
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41272 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41278 \begin_inset Index idx
41281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 -packages ! japanese
41288 , when using this, set the document language to
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41302 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41307 , when using this, set the document language to
41312 \begin_layout Description
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41321 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41326 , when using this, set the document language to
41331 \begin_layout Description
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41336 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41339 \begin_layout Description
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41352 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41355 \begin_layout Description
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41368 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41369 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41370 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41373 \begin_layout Description
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41385 \begin_layout Description
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41394 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41395 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41398 \begin_layout Description
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41407 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41413 \begin_inset Index idx
41416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41423 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41426 \begin_layout Description
41428 \begin_inset space ~
41436 \begin_inset space ~
41439 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41446 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41449 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41456 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41457 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41459 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41462 \begin_layout Description
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41471 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41477 \begin_inset Index idx
41480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41487 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41490 \begin_layout Description
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41495 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41501 \begin_inset Index idx
41504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41506 -packages ! inputenc
41512 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41516 \begin_layout Description
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41529 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_layout Description
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41549 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41550 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41551 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41555 \begin_layout Description
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41565 \begin_inset space ~
41568 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41569 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41572 \begin_layout Section
41574 \begin_inset Index idx
41577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41584 \begin_inset Index idx
41587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41594 \begin_inset Index idx
41597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41598 Color ! Shaded boxes
41604 \begin_inset Index idx
41607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 Here you can alter the font color for the
41621 (default: black), for
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41629 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41633 (default: white) and for
41636 \begin_inset space ~
41646 sets the color back to the default.
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41650 Clicking any button showing
41658 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41659 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41660 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41661 later more quickly.
41664 \begin_layout Standard
41665 Note, if you change the
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41673 font color and use the option
41676 \begin_inset space ~
41681 in the document settings under
41684 \begin_inset space ~
41689 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41696 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41703 \begin_layout Standard
41704 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41710 \begin_layout Standard
41714 \begin_inset space ~
41723 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41729 Code after a forced page break:
41732 \begin_layout Itemize
41733 For the page color:
41734 \begin_inset Newline newline
41741 pagecolor{color name}
41744 \begin_layout Itemize
41745 For the text color:
41746 \begin_inset Newline newline
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 You are restricted to one of
41793 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41806 \begin_inset Newline newline
41809 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41810 names to refer to them:
41813 \begin_layout Itemize
41819 \begin_inset Newline newline
41824 page_backgroundcolor
41827 \begin_layout Itemize
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41837 \begin_inset Newline newline
41845 \begin_layout Itemize
41849 \begin_inset space ~
41855 \begin_inset Newline newline
41863 \begin_layout Itemize
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_inset Newline newline
41881 \begin_layout Standard
41882 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41893 \begin_inset space ~
41901 \begin_layout Section
41905 \begin_layout Standard
41906 Here you can adjust the
41910 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41914 as described in section
41915 \begin_inset space ~
41919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41921 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41928 \begin_layout Section
41932 \begin_layout Standard
41933 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41939 \begin_inset Index idx
41942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41954 \begin_inset Index idx
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41959 -packages ! jurabib
41967 Sectioned bibliography
41969 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41975 \begin_inset Index idx
41978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41980 -packages ! bibtopic
41985 and you can select a
41989 for the generation of the bibliography.
41990 For a further description see section
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41997 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42004 \begin_layout Section
42008 \begin_layout Standard
42009 Here you can define the
42013 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42015 \begin_inset space ~
42019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42021 reference "sec:Index"
42028 \begin_layout Section
42032 \begin_layout Standard
42033 The PDF properties are explained in section
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42040 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42047 \begin_layout Section
42051 \begin_layout Standard
42052 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42053 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42059 \begin_inset Index idx
42062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 -packages ! amsmath
42074 \begin_inset Index idx
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 -packages ! amssymb
42089 \begin_inset Index idx
42092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 \begin_inset Index idx
42107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 \begin_inset Index idx
42122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42124 -packages ! mathdots
42134 \begin_inset Index idx
42137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42139 -packages ! mathtools
42149 \begin_inset Index idx
42152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 \begin_inset Index idx
42167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42169 -packages ! stackrel
42179 \begin_inset Index idx
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 -packages ! stmaryrd
42194 \begin_inset Index idx
42197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 -packages ! undertilde
42204 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42207 \begin_layout Description
42208 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42209 -errors in formulas,
42210 ensure that you have this enabled.
42213 \begin_layout Description
42214 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42215 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42216 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42220 \begin_layout Description
42221 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_layout Description
42237 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42252 \begin_layout Description
42253 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42264 \begin_layout Description
42265 mathtools is used for the math commands
42301 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42308 \begin_layout Description
42309 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42311 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42320 \begin_layout Description
42321 stackrel is used for the math command
42338 \begin_layout Description
42339 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42342 \begin_layout Description
42343 undertilde is used for the math command
42351 Accents for one Character
42360 \begin_layout Section
42364 \begin_layout Standard
42365 The float placement options are described in the section
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42376 \begin_inset space ~
42384 \begin_layout Section
42388 \begin_layout Standard
42389 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42391 Program Code Listings
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \begin_layout Section
42408 \begin_layout Standard
42409 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42417 set to be used and set the
42422 The itemize environment is described in section
42423 \begin_inset space ~
42427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42429 reference "sec:Itemize"
42436 \begin_layout Standard
42437 You can furthermore specify a
42440 \begin_inset space ~
42445 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42446 command of the desired character.
42447 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42454 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42460 \begin_inset space \space{}
42464 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42474 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42475 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42487 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42488 -packages in the preamble (menu
42491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42492 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42501 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42505 usepackage{textcomp}
42508 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42512 usepackage{amssymb}
42522 \begin_layout Section
42526 \begin_layout Standard
42527 Branches are described in section
42528 \begin_inset space ~
42532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42534 reference "sec:Branches"
42541 \begin_layout Section
42543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42545 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42552 \begin_layout Standard
42553 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42556 \begin_layout Description
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42562 \begin_inset space ~
42565 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42585 View Master Document
42586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42593 Update Master Document
42594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42601 menu or the toolbar.
42602 The default is set in
42604 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42605 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42607 \begin_inset space ~
42610 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42620 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42627 \begin_layout Description
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42633 \begin_inset space ~
42636 Output settings for the menu
42638 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42646 For a detailed description see section
42648 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42661 \begin_layout Description
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_inset space ~
42670 Options offers settings for the export format
42678 \begin_inset space ~
42683 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42696 settings are described in detail in section
42698 Math Output in XHTML
42703 \begin_inset space ~
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42716 \begin_inset space ~
42721 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42724 \begin_layout Section
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42735 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42737 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42739 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42745 -syntax is given in section
42746 \begin_inset space ~
42750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42752 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42759 \begin_layout Chapter
42765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42767 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42772 \begin_inset Index idx
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 \begin_layout Standard
42785 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42787 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42791 It has the following submenus.
42794 \begin_layout Section
42798 \begin_layout Subsection
42802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42803 User Interface File
42804 \begin_inset Index idx
42807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42808 Customization ! of toolbars
42814 \begin_inset Index idx
42817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 Customization ! of menus
42826 \begin_layout Standard
42827 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42828 interface (ui) file.
42829 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42837 \begin_layout Description
42842 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42845 \begin_layout Description
42852 the menu entries in popup context menus
42855 \begin_layout Description
42860 specifies the toolbar buttons
42863 \begin_layout Standard
42864 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42865 and edit the entries.
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42869 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42881 entries must be finished with an explicit
42906 and in the case of the
42907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42919 The syntax for the entries is:
42922 \begin_layout Standard
42923 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42952 \begin_layout Standard
42954 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42957 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42958 -functions are listed in the menu
42960 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42962 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42977 \begin_layout Standard
42978 For example, assuming you use the menu
42980 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42983 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42987 \begin_layout Standard
42988 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43012 \begin_layout Standard
43014 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43029 to have the sixth bookmark.
43032 \begin_layout Standard
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43041 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43042 's toolbar buttons.
43043 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43047 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43061 Enable tool tips in main work area
43063 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43076 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43077 should display in the menu
43079 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_layout Subsection
43093 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43097 \begin_layout Standard
43100 Restore window layouts and geometries
43103 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43104 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43108 \begin_layout Standard
43111 Restore cursor positions
43113 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43117 \begin_layout Standard
43120 Load opened files from last session
43122 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43126 \begin_layout Standard
43129 Clear all session information
43131 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43132 sessions (cursor positions, names
43133 of last opened documents, etc.).
43136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43140 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43145 \begin_inset Index idx
43148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43160 Backup original documents when saving
43162 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43163 it was saved the last time.
43164 It is stored in the
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_inset space ~
43177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43179 reference "sec:Paths"
43183 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43192 The backup file has the file extension
43193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43207 \begin_layout Standard
43210 Backup documents, every
43212 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43215 \begin_layout Standard
43218 Save documents compressed by default
43220 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43227 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43232 This applies to newly created documents only.
43233 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43237 Windows & work area
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43243 Open documents in tabs
43245 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43254 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43267 reference "sec:Paths"
43271 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43278 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43279 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43280 of \SpecialChar LyX
43282 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43283 instance is created for each file.
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43289 Single close-tab button
43291 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43301 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43302 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43305 \begin_layout Standard
43306 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43314 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43315 before the change takes effect.
43323 \begin_layout Standard
43328 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43330 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43332 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43336 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43337 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43338 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43341 \begin_layout Subsection
43343 \begin_inset Index idx
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43355 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43362 \begin_layout Standard
43363 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43368 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43376 This section only deals with the fonts
43380 the \SpecialChar LyX
43382 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43386 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43397 \begin_layout Standard
43398 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43415 (depends on the system) as its
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 You can change the font size with the
43442 \begin_layout Standard
43447 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43452 points have the size of 1
43453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43463 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43468 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43473 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43480 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43490 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43492 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43493 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43494 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43495 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43496 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43498 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_layout Subsection
43507 \begin_inset Index idx
43510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43511 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43518 \begin_inset Index idx
43521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43530 \begin_layout Standard
43531 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43532 by choosing an item in the
43533 list and selecting the
43540 \begin_layout Standard
43541 By checking the option
43545 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43548 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43558 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43561 \begin_layout Subsection
43563 \begin_inset Index idx
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43575 \begin_layout Standard
43576 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43580 \begin_layout Standard
43585 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43586 This feature is described in section
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43593 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43600 \begin_layout Standard
43601 Checking the option
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43617 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43620 \begin_layout Section
43622 \begin_inset Index idx
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 \begin_layout Subsection
43638 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43642 \begin_layout Standard
43645 Cursor follows scrollbar
43647 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43651 \begin_layout Standard
43652 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43653 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43654 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43660 Scroll below end of document
43662 is self-explanatory.
43665 \begin_layout Standard
43666 In \SpecialChar LyX
43667 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43674 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43676 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43677 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43680 \begin_layout Standard
43683 Sort environments alphabetically
43685 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43688 \begin_layout Standard
43691 Group environments by their category
43693 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43696 \begin_layout Standard
43701 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43716 \begin_layout Standard
43717 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43722 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43723 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43727 \begin_layout Subsection
43729 \begin_inset Index idx
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43739 \begin_inset Index idx
43742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43743 Settings ! Shortcuts
43751 \begin_layout Standard
43756 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43758 Several binding files are available, among them:
43761 \begin_layout Description
43762 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43765 \begin_layout Description
43766 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43778 \begin_layout Description
43779 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43790 \begin_layout Standard
43791 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43796 , and binding files for special languages.
43797 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43802 \begin_inset space \space{}
43806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43814 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43815 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43816 will try to use the appropriate binding
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43821 Some binding files, like
43825 , only have a limited scope.
43826 When looking at the end of the file
43830 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43833 \begin_layout Standard
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_inset space ~
43846 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43847 in the selected key binding file.
43850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43854 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43859 \begin_inset Index idx
43862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43863 Key Bindings ! Editing
43871 \begin_layout Standard
43872 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43873 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43874 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43875 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43878 Show key-bindings containing
43881 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43882 Insert there for example as keyword
43883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43890 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43891 functions that contain
43892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43900 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43901 All \SpecialChar LyX
43902 functions are also listed in the file
43907 that you will find in the
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 For example, to add the shortcut
43923 , select the function and press the
43928 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43929 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43932 \begin_layout Standard
43933 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43934 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43936 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43937 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43939 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43948 \begin_layout Standard
43949 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43951 The syntax of the entries is:
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43979 \begin_layout Subsection
43981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43983 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43988 \begin_inset Index idx
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43998 \begin_inset Index idx
44001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44002 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44010 \begin_layout Standard
44011 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44012 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44013 provides keyboard maps.
44014 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44015 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44027 and select the keyboard map file named
44034 \begin_layout Standard
44043 keyboard map and, if you use the
44047 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44050 arg "keymap-primary"
44056 arg "keymap-secondary"
44059 respectively or toggle between them with
44062 arg "keymap-toggle"
44068 \begin_layout Standard
44069 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44077 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44086 \begin_layout Standard
44087 You can also specify the mouse
44089 Wheel scrolling speed
44092 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44096 Middle mouse button pasting
44098 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44099 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44102 \begin_layout Standard
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44114 \begin_inset space ~
44119 you can select a key for zooming.
44120 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44123 \begin_layout Subsection
44127 \begin_layout Standard
44128 Input completion is described in section
44129 \begin_inset space ~
44133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44135 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44142 \begin_layout Section
44144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44151 \begin_inset Index idx
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44161 \begin_inset Index idx
44164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44173 \begin_layout Standard
44174 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44175 are normally determined during
44177 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44180 \begin_layout Description
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44185 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44186 's working directory.
44187 It is the default when you
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_layout Description
44208 \begin_inset space ~
44211 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44227 \begin_layout Description
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44232 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44238 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44242 \begin_inset Newline newline
44246 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44259 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44267 \begin_layout Description
44269 \begin_inset space ~
44273 \begin_inset Index idx
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44283 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44290 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44298 will be used to save the backups.
44299 \begin_inset Newline newline
44302 Backup files have the ending
44303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44313 \begin_layout Description
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44318 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44319 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44321 \begin_inset Newline newline
44328 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44334 You can edit this file with the program
44343 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44344 in its preferences under
44347 \begin_inset space ~
44353 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44358 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44360 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44361 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44367 and \SpecialChar LyX
44368 need to be running the same time.
44369 \begin_inset Newline newline
44372 The pipe is also used for the
44377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44383 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44388 \begin_inset Newline newline
44391 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44392 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44393 \begin_inset Newline newline
44409 \begin_layout Description
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44414 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44417 \begin_layout Description
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44422 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44423 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44424 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44427 \begin_layout Description
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44432 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44438 You only need to specify it if you are using
44442 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44444 For \SpecialChar LyX
44449 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44453 \begin_layout Description
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44458 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44459 When \SpecialChar LyX
44460 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44461 to find it on the system.
44462 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44464 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44473 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44474 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44477 \begin_layout Description
44479 \begin_inset space ~
44482 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44483 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44484 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44485 code or in the document
44487 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44489 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44490 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44491 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44492 scanned for the input files.
44493 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44494 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44496 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44497 compilation may fail for some documents.
44500 \begin_layout Section
44504 \begin_layout Standard
44505 Here you can insert your
44514 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44522 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44526 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44529 \begin_layout Section
44531 \begin_inset Index idx
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44535 Language ! Settings
44541 \begin_inset Index idx
44544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44545 Settings ! Language
44553 \begin_layout Subsection
44555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44557 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44564 \begin_layout Description
44566 \begin_inset space ~
44570 \begin_inset space ~
44573 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44575 You can find its actual translation status here:
44576 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44578 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44585 \begin_layout Description
44587 \begin_inset space ~
44590 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44591 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44592 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44593 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44610 The most widespread language package is
44615 \begin_inset Index idx
44618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44625 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44627 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44628 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44629 come with the alternative
44635 \begin_inset Index idx
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 -packages ! polyglossia
44645 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44646 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44652 The available selections are described in section
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44659 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44666 \begin_layout Description
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44671 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44672 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44673 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44674 An example is the start command
44680 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44682 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44686 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44701 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44706 \begin_layout Description
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44716 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44717 command toggles the package on and off.
44720 \begin_layout Description
44722 \begin_inset space ~
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44729 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44733 \begin_layout Description
44735 \begin_inset space ~
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44742 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44746 \begin_layout Description
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44752 \begin_inset space ~
44755 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44756 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44757 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44759 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44766 \begin_layout Description
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44771 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44773 When this option is not set, the
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44781 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44783 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44794 \begin_layout Description
44796 \begin_inset space ~
44802 \begin_inset space ~
44808 When it is not set, the
44811 \begin_inset space ~
44816 is set to the end of the document.
44819 \begin_layout Description
44821 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44828 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44829 language will be underlined in blue.
44832 \begin_layout Description
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_inset space ~
44841 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44842 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44845 \begin_layout Description
44847 \begin_inset space ~
44850 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44851 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44852 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44853 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44856 \begin_layout Subsection
44860 \begin_layout Standard
44861 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44862 \begin_inset space ~
44866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44868 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44875 \begin_layout Section
44879 \begin_layout Subsection
44883 \begin_layout Description
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44888 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44890 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44892 \begin_inset space ~
44898 For a detailed description see section
44900 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44905 \begin_inset space ~
44913 \begin_layout Description
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44921 \begin_layout Description
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44930 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44933 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44934 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44942 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44945 \begin_layout Description
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44951 \begin_inset Index idx
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44961 \begin_inset Index idx
44964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 Settings ! Date format
44970 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44971 \begin_inset Newline newline
44975 \begin_inset Flex URL
44978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44986 \begin_inset Newline newline
44989 For example the format
44990 \begin_inset Newline newline
44994 \begin_inset Newline newline
44997 prints the date as day/month/year.
45000 \begin_layout Description
45002 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45009 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45010 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45013 \begin_layout Description
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45018 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45020 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45022 \begin_inset space ~
45028 For a detailed description see section
45030 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_layout Subsection
45049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45051 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45056 \begin_inset Index idx
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45060 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45069 \begin_layout Description
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45086 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45091 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45112 are used for Cyrillic.
45113 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45126 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45128 sets up in the background.
45129 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45132 \begin_layout Description
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45146 \begin_inset space ~
45149 options They only have an effect when the program
45153 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45156 \begin_layout Standard
45157 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45158 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45159 manuals of the applications.
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45167 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45174 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45181 \begin_layout Description
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45186 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45193 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45200 \begin_layout Description
45202 \begin_inset space ~
45205 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45212 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45219 \begin_layout Description
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45228 command Command for the program
45230 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45233 that is described in the section
45235 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45240 Additional Features
45245 \begin_layout Standard
45246 There are additionally the following options:
45249 \begin_layout Description
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45271 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45289 to separate folders.
45290 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45292 \begin_inset Index idx
45295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45302 \begin_inset Index idx
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45314 \begin_layout Description
45316 \begin_inset space ~
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_inset space ~
45336 \begin_inset space ~
45339 changes Removes all manually set
45345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45346 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45353 dialog when changing the document class.
45356 \begin_layout Section
45358 \begin_inset space ~
45362 \begin_inset Index idx
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 \begin_layout Subsection
45376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45378 name "subsec:Converters"
45383 \begin_inset Index idx
45386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45396 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45397 from one format to another.
45398 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45399 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45406 \begin_inset space ~
45411 field and press the
45416 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45420 \begin_inset space ~
45425 drop-down list, modify the
45429 field and press the
45436 \begin_layout Standard
45439 Converter File Cache
45445 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45447 Maximum Age (in days
45450 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45451 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45454 \begin_layout Standard
45455 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45456 definition, is described in the section
45467 \begin_layout Subsection
45469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45471 name "sec:File-Formats"
45476 \begin_inset Index idx
45479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45486 \begin_inset Index idx
45489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45509 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45512 \begin_layout Standard
45513 You can also define the
45515 Default output format
45517 that is used when you use
45519 View, Update, View Master Document
45523 Update Master Document
45529 menu or the toolbar.
45532 \begin_layout Standard
45533 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45544 \begin_layout Standard
45545 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45547 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45548 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45549 This is done by specifying a
45554 More about this is described in the section
45565 \begin_layout Chapter
45566 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45568 \begin_inset Index idx
45571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45580 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45587 \begin_layout Standard
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45595 reference "tab:Units"
45599 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45600 and used in this documentation.
45603 \begin_layout Standard
45604 \begin_inset Float table
45610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45637 \begin_inset Tabular
45638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45848 scaled point (65536
45849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45927 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46000 % of original image width
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 \begin_layout Chapter
46318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46320 name "chap:Credits"
46327 \begin_layout Standard
46328 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46329 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46332 \begin_layout Itemize
46335 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46338 \begin_layout Itemize
46344 \begin_layout Itemize
46350 \begin_layout Itemize
46356 \begin_layout Itemize
46362 \begin_layout Itemize
46368 \begin_layout Itemize
46374 \begin_layout Itemize
46380 \begin_layout Itemize
46383 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46386 \begin_layout Itemize
46392 \begin_layout Itemize
46398 \begin_layout Itemize
46404 \begin_layout Itemize
46410 \begin_layout Itemize
46416 \begin_layout Itemize
46422 \begin_layout Itemize
46428 \begin_layout Itemize
46434 \begin_layout Itemize
46435 The \SpecialChar LyX
46437 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46446 \begin_layout Standard
46447 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46450 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46457 \begin_layout Bibliography
46458 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46459 LatexCommand bibitem
46465 The \SpecialChar LyX
46467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46470 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46475 \begin_inset Newline newline
46479 \begin_inset Flex URL
46482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46492 \begin_layout Bibliography
46493 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46494 LatexCommand bibitem
46495 key "latexcompanion"
46499 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46501 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46502 Companion Second Edition.
46505 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46508 \begin_layout Bibliography
46509 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46510 LatexCommand bibitem
46515 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46518 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46522 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46525 \begin_layout Bibliography
46526 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46527 LatexCommand bibitem
46535 : A Document Preparation System.
46538 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46541 \begin_layout Bibliography
46542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46543 LatexCommand bibitem
46552 The \SpecialChar TeX
46556 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46559 \begin_layout Bibliography
46560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46561 LatexCommand bibitem
46566 The \SpecialChar TeX
46568 \begin_inset Newline newline
46572 \begin_inset Flex URL
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46577 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46585 \begin_layout Bibliography
46586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46587 LatexCommand bibitem
46592 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46594 \begin_inset Newline newline
46598 \begin_inset Flex URL
46601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46603 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46611 \begin_layout Bibliography
46612 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46613 LatexCommand bibitem
46619 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46621 name "Documentation"
46622 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46628 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46632 \begin_inset Newline newline
46636 \begin_inset Flex URL
46639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46641 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46649 \begin_layout Bibliography
46650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46651 LatexCommand bibitem
46657 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46659 name "Documentation"
46660 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46664 how to use the program
46666 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46670 \begin_inset Newline newline
46674 \begin_inset Flex URL
46677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46687 \begin_layout Bibliography
46688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46689 LatexCommand bibitem
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46697 name "Documentation"
46698 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46707 \begin_inset Newline newline
46711 \begin_inset Flex URL
46714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46716 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46724 \begin_layout Bibliography
46725 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46726 LatexCommand bibitem
46727 key "makeindex-man"
46732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46735 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46744 \begin_inset Newline newline
46748 \begin_inset Flex URL
46751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46753 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46761 \begin_layout Bibliography
46762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46763 LatexCommand bibitem
46769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46771 name "Documentation"
46772 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46781 \begin_inset Newline newline
46785 \begin_inset Flex URL
46788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46798 \begin_layout Bibliography
46799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46800 LatexCommand bibitem
46806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46808 name "Documentation"
46809 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46813 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46815 \begin_inset Newline newline
46819 \begin_inset Flex URL
46822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46824 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46832 \begin_layout Bibliography
46833 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46834 LatexCommand bibitem
46840 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46842 name "Documentation"
46843 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46847 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46853 \begin_inset Index idx
46856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46858 -packages ! caption
46864 \begin_inset Newline newline
46868 \begin_inset Flex URL
46871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46873 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46881 \begin_layout Bibliography
46882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46883 LatexCommand bibitem
46889 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46891 name "Documentation"
46892 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46902 \begin_inset Index idx
46905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46907 -packages ! enumitem
46913 \begin_inset Newline newline
46917 \begin_inset Flex URL
46920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46922 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46930 \begin_layout Bibliography
46931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46932 LatexCommand bibitem
46938 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46940 name "Documentation"
46941 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46945 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46951 \begin_inset Index idx
46954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 -packages ! fancyhdr
46962 \begin_inset Newline newline
46966 \begin_inset Flex URL
46969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46971 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46979 \begin_layout Bibliography
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46981 LatexCommand bibitem
46987 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46989 name "Documentation"
46990 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46994 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47000 \begin_inset Index idx
47003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47005 -packages ! hyperref
47011 \begin_inset Newline newline
47015 \begin_inset Flex URL
47018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47028 \begin_layout Bibliography
47029 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47030 LatexCommand bibitem
47036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47038 name "Documentation"
47039 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47043 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47049 \begin_inset Index idx
47052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47054 -packages ! nomencl
47060 \begin_inset Newline newline
47064 \begin_inset Flex URL
47067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47069 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47077 \begin_layout Bibliography
47078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47079 LatexCommand bibitem
47085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47087 name "Documentation"
47088 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47092 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47098 \begin_inset Index idx
47101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47103 -packages ! prettyref
47109 \begin_inset Newline newline
47113 \begin_inset Flex URL
47116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47118 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47126 \begin_layout Bibliography
47127 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47128 LatexCommand bibitem
47134 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47136 name "Documentation"
47137 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47141 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47147 \begin_inset Index idx
47150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47152 -packages ! refstyle
47158 \begin_inset Newline newline
47162 \begin_inset Flex URL
47165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47167 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47175 \begin_layout Bibliography
47176 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47177 LatexCommand bibitem
47183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47186 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47190 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47192 \begin_inset Newline newline
47196 \begin_inset Flex URL
47199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47201 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47209 \begin_layout Bibliography
47210 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47211 LatexCommand bibitem
47217 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47220 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47224 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47226 \begin_inset Newline newline
47230 \begin_inset Flex URL
47233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47235 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47243 \begin_layout Bibliography
47244 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47245 LatexCommand bibitem
47251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47254 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47258 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47259 for Cyrillic languages:
47260 \begin_inset Newline newline
47264 \begin_inset Flex URL
47267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47269 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47277 \begin_layout Bibliography
47278 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47279 LatexCommand bibitem
47285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47288 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47292 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47294 \begin_inset Newline newline
47298 \begin_inset Flex URL
47301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47303 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47311 \begin_layout Bibliography
47312 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47313 LatexCommand bibitem
47319 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47322 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47326 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47328 \begin_inset Newline newline
47332 \begin_inset Flex URL
47335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47337 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47345 \begin_layout Bibliography
47346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47347 LatexCommand bibitem
47353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47356 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47360 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47362 \begin_inset Newline newline
47366 \begin_inset Flex URL
47369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47371 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47379 \begin_layout Bibliography
47380 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47381 LatexCommand bibitem
47387 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47390 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47394 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47396 \begin_inset Newline newline
47400 \begin_inset Flex URL
47403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47405 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47413 \begin_layout Bibliography
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47415 LatexCommand bibitem
47421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47424 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47428 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47430 \begin_inset Newline newline
47434 \begin_inset Flex URL
47437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47439 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47447 \begin_layout Bibliography
47448 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47449 LatexCommand bibitem
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47458 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47462 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47464 \begin_inset Newline newline
47468 \begin_inset Flex URL
47471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47473 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47481 \begin_layout Bibliography
47482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47483 LatexCommand bibitem
47489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47492 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47496 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47498 \begin_inset Newline newline
47502 \begin_inset Flex URL
47505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47507 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47515 \begin_layout Bibliography
47516 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47517 LatexCommand bibitem
47523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47526 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47530 about new features in
47536 \begin_inset Newline newline
47540 \begin_inset Flex URL
47543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47545 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47553 \begin_layout Standard
47554 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47588 \begin_inset Note Note
47591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47598 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47599 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47600 bibliography is the second one:
47608 \begin_layout Standard
47609 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47610 LatexCommand bibtex
47611 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47612 options "biblio/alphadin"
47619 \begin_layout Standard
47620 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47624 \begin_layout Standard
47625 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47626 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47632 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47633 LatexCommand printindex